383
Advanced Assembly Design using Creo Parametric 2.0 T3904-390-02 Authored and published using

T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

Advanced Assembly Design using CreoParametric 2.0

Citation preview

Page 1: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Advanced Assembly Design using CreoParametric 2.0

T3904-390-02

Authored and published using

Page 2: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Copyright © 2012 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.Copyright for PTC software products is with Parametric Technology Corporation, itssubsidiary companies (collectively “PTC”), and their respective licensors. This softwareis provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets andproprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States andother countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed tothird parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreementexcept with written prior approval from PTC.UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT INCIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.User and training guides and related documentation from PTC is subject to the copyrightlaws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreementthat restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants tothe licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentationif provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordancewith the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copymade shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice providedby PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent ofPTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced toany form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by anymeans without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to makecopies for such purposes.Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject tochange without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment byPTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that mayappear in this document.For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent and Licensing Information seebackside of this guide.

Page 3: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

About PTC University

Welcome to PTC University!With an unmatched depth and breadth of product development knowledge,PTC University helps you realize the most value from PTC products. OnlyPTC University offers:

• An innovative learning methodology – PTC’s Precision LearningMethodology is a proven proprietary approach used by PTC to develop anddeliver learning solutions.

• Flexible Delivery Options – PTC University ensures you receive the samequality training programs regardless of the learning style. Our extensiveexperience, innovative learning techniques, and targeted learning modulesfacilitate the rapid retention of concepts, and higher user productivity.

• Premier Content and Expertise – A thorough instructor certification processand direct access to the PTC product development and PTC consultingorganizations means that only PTC courses can give you highly-qualifiedinstructors, the most up-to-date product information and best practicesderived from thousands of deployments.

• Global Focus – PTC University delivers training where and when youneed it by providing over 100 training centers located across 35 countriesoffering content in nine languages.

• Delivering Value – A role-based learning design ensures the right peoplehave the right tools to do their jobs productively while supporting theorganization’s overall performance goals.

The course you are about to take will expose you to a number of learningofferings that PTC University has available. These include:

• Instructor-led Training (ILT) – The ideal blend of classroom lectures,personal demonstrations, hands-on workshops, assessments, andpost-classroom tools.

• Pro/FICIENCY – This Web-based, skills assessment anddevelopment-planning tool will help improve your skills and productivity.

• eLearning Libraries – 24/7 access to Web-based training that willcompliment your instructor-led course.

• Precision LMS – A powerful learning management system that will manageyour eLearning Library and Pro/FICIENCY assessments.

PTC University additionally offers Precision Learning Programs. These arecorporate learning programs designed to your organization’s specific goals,current skills, desired competencies, and training preferences.

Whatever your learning needs are, PTC University can help you get the mostout of your PTC products.

Page 4: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers

North America• Education Services Registration– Tel: (888) 782-3773– Fax: (781) 370-5307

• Technical Support (Monday - Friday)– Tel: (800) 477-6435– Fax: (781) 707-0328

• License Management and Contracts– Tel: 877-ASK-4-PTC (877-275-4782)– Fax: (781) 707-0331

Europe• Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting– Tel: +800-PTC-4-HELP (00-800-78-24-43-57)

Asia• Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contactinformation.

In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Website contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directionsto training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also reach technicalsupport, and register for online service options such as knowledge basesearches, reference libraries, and documentation. You can also find generalinformation about PTC, PTC Products, Consulting Services, CustomerSupport, and PTC Partners.

Page 5: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Precision Learning

Precision Learning in the ClassroomPTC University uses the Precision Learning methodology to developeffective, comprehensive class material that will improve the productivityof both individuals and organizations. PTC then teaches using the proveninstructional design principal of ‘Tell Me, Show Me, Let Me Do’:

• Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the keyconcepts.

• These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in thesoftware application.

• You then apply the concepts through structured exercises.After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided to enable you toassess your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will alsoidentify the class topics that require further review.

At the end of the class, you will either take a Pro/FICIENCY assessment viayour PTC University eLearning account, or your instructor will provide trainingon how to do this after the class.

Precision Learning After the ClassEach student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University eLearningaccount. This account will be automatically created if you do not alreadyhave one.

As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account:

• A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates aRecommended Learning Report based on your results.

• A Web-based training version of the course, based on the sameinstructional approach of lecture, demonstration, and exercise. TheRecommended Learning Report will link directly to sections of this trainingthat you may want to review.

Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages.The Web-based training is available in your account for one year after thelive class.

Page 6: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Precision Learning Recommendations

PTC uses a role-based training approach. The roles and the associatedtraining are graphically displayed in a curriculum map. Curriculum maps areavailable for numerous PTC products and versions in the training section ofour Web site at http://www.ptc.com/services/edserv/learning/paths/index.htm.

Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language andthat the map above is partial and for illustration purposes only.

Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the mapcorresponding to the course you are taking. This review, along with instructorrecommendations, should give you some ideas for additional training thatcorresponds to your role and job functions.

Page 7: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Training Agenda

Day 1Module 01 ― Using Advanced Assembly ConstraintsModule 02 ― Creating and Using Component InterfacesModule 03 ― Creating and Using Flexible ComponentsModule 04 ― Restructuring and Mirroring Assemblies

Day 2Module 05 ― Using Assembly Features and ShrinkwrapModule 06 ― Replacing Components in an AssemblyModule 07 ― Understanding the Basics of Simplified RepsModule 08 ― Creating Cross-Sections, Display Styles, Layer States, and

Combined Views

Day 3Module 09 ― Substituting Components using User Defined, Envelopes,

and Simplified RepsModule 10 ― Understanding Advanced Simplified Rep FunctionalityModule 11 ― Creating and Using Assembly Structure and SkeletonsModule 12 ― Project

Page 8: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN
Page 9: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Table of Contents

Advanced Assembly Design using Creo Parametric 2.0Using Advanced Assembly Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Constraining Components using Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Constraining Two Coordinate Systems using Coincident . . . . . . . . . 1-4Constraining a Point on a Line using Coincident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Constraining a Point on a Surface using Coincident . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Constraining an Edge on a Surface using Coincident . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Constraining a Point on a Point using Coincident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Creating a Tangent Constraint using Auto Constrain . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Configuring Constraint Sets with Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Creating and Using Component Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Understanding Component Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Using a Placing Component Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Using a Receiving Component Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Creating a Component Interface using the Save as Interface Dialog

Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Auto Placing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Copying and Pasting Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Repeating Component Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Creating and Using Flexible Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Adding Flexibility to a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Placing Flexible Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Adding Flexibility to Already Placed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Using Flexible Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Restructuring and Mirroring Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Restructuring and Reordering Assembly Components . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Creating Mirrored Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Creating Mirrored Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Creating Mirrored Sub-Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Using Assembly Features and Shrinkwrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Understanding Assembly Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Understanding Assembly Feature Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Creating an Assembly Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Creating Assembly Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Creating a Shrinkwrap Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Creating a Shrinkwrap Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Summarizing Shrinkwrap Features and Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Replacing Components in an Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Page 10: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Understanding Component Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Replacing Components using Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Replacing Components using Reference Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Replacing Components using By Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Replacing Unrelated Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13Understanding Interchange Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Replacing using a Functional Interchange Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Understanding the Basics of Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Retrieving Assembly Subsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Understanding Standard Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Understanding Custom Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Lightweight Graphics Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Using Graphics Simplified Reps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Using Geometry Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Excluding Components using Simplified Reps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component Chooser . . . . . . . . 7-27Creating a Default Envelope Simplified Rep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32Creating Part Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37Opening Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Creating Cross-Sections, Display Styles, Layer States, and CombinedViews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Understanding Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Creating Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Creating Offset Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Creating Zone Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Creating Display Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20Creating Layer States in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25Creating Combination Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

Substituting Components using User Defined, Envelopes, andSimplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Understanding Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Creating and using a Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Envelope . . . . . . . 9-5Creating and Using a Faceted Shrinkwrap Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Creating and Using an All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap Envelope . . . 9-17Creating and Using a Create Features Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Creating and Using an Envelope Copied from an Existing Part. . . . 9-28Substituting Components using User Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Substituting by Interchange and Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

Understanding Advanced Simplified Rep Functionality . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Searching for Components for Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Creating Simplified Reps by Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Page 11: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Simplified Reps using Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Creating Simplified Reps by Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Creating Simplified Reps using Exterior Components . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Defining Simplified Reps using Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Using On-Demand Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Creating External Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Creating and Using Assembly Structure and Skeletons . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Understanding Skeletons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2Creating an Assembly Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4Creating Skeletons for Space Claims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9Creating Skeletons for Placement References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12Copying a Model to a Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17Creating Multiple Skeletons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18Sharing Skeleton Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22Creating and Placing Models using Skeleton References . . . . . . . 11-26Creating a Motion Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32Sketching a Motion Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34Creating Bodies for a Motion Skeleton. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38Assigning Connections for a Motion Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41Creating Solid Models from a Motion Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46

Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1The Table Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2Skeleton Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3The Shaft and Arm Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4Components to Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5Editing the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Page 12: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN
Page 13: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Student Preface — Using the HeaderIn this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout andthe header used to begin each lab in Creo Parametric.

Course Handbook Layout:

• Modules– Topics

♦ Concept♦ Theory♦ Procedure♦ Exercise (if applicable)

Procedure / Exercise Header:

Course Handbook LayoutThe information in this course handbook is organized to help students locateinformation after the course is complete. Each course is organized intomodules, each covering a general subject. Each module contains topics,with each topic focused on a specific portion of the module subject. Eachindividual topic in the module is divided into the following sections:• Concept — This section contains the initial introduction to the topic andis presented during the class lecture as an overhead slide, typically withfigures and bullets.

Page 14: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Theory — This section provides detailed information about contentintroduced in the Concept, and is discussed in the class lecture but notshown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains additionalparagraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures.

• Procedure— This section provides step-by-step instructions about how tocomplete the topic within Creo Parametric. Procedures are short, focused,and cover a specific topic. Procedures are found in the Student Handbookonly. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge topics thatcontain only Concept and Theory.

• Exercise — Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they aretypically longer, more involved, and use more complicated models.Exercises also may cover multiple topics, so not every topic will have anassociated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guideand/or the online exercise HTML files.

The first module for certain courses is known as a “processmodule.” Process modules introduce you to the generic high-levelprocesses that will be taught over the span of the entire course.

Procedure / Exercise HeaderTo make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as “labs”) asconcise as possible, each begins with a “header.” The header lists the nameof the lab, the working directory, and the file you are to open.

The following items are indicated in the figure above, where applicable:

1. Procedure/Exercise Name— This is the name of the lab.2. Scenario — This briefly describes what will be done in the lab. The

Scenario is only found in Exercises.3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed— A reminder that you should

close any open files and erase them from memory:

• Click Close until the icon is no longer displayed.

• Click Erase Not Displayed and then click OK.4. Folder Name— This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are

stored in topic folders within specific functional area folders. The path tothe lab files is:• PTCU\CreoParametric2\functional_area_folder\topic_folderIn the example, Round is the functional area folder and Variableis the topic folder, so you would set the Working Directory toPTCU\CreoParametric2\Round\Variable.• To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree orbrowser, and select Set Working Directory.

5. Model to Open — This is the file to be opened from the workingdirectory. In the above example, VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model toopen. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, and so on. Ifyou are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and insteadcreate a new model, you will see Create New.• To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser andselect Open.

Page 15: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

6. Task Name— Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be oneor more tasks within a lab.

7. Lab Steps — These are the individual steps required to completea task.

Two other items to note for labs:

• Saving — Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unlessotherwise stated.

• Exercises— Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.

Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training LabsBefore you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that youconfigure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the labexercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the training labs on acomputer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps:

• Extract the class files zip file to a root level drive such as C: or D:.– The extracted zip will create the default folder path automatically, such

as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2\.• Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.– Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.– Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.– Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as

the default folder. For example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2\.• Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.– The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric2 folder.

You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.

Page 16: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Student Preface — Using the HeaderIn this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the CreoParametric working environment for each lab in the course.

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder EXTRUDE_1.PRT

Step 1: Configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to runthe lab exercises properly.

Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computeroutside of a training center, otherwise proceed to Task 2.

1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:.• The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically,such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2.

2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.• Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.• Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.• Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to bePTCU\CreoParametric2.

3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.• The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric2 folder.You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.

Step 2: Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory toavoid any possible conflicts.

1. If you currently have files open, click Close from the Quick Accesstoolbar, until the icon no longer displays.

2. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group in the ribbon.• Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.

Page 17: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Step 3: Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedureand set the folder indicated in the header as the Creo Parametricworking directory.

1. Notice the SampleFunc-tionalArea\Topic1_Folder asindicated in the header above.

2. If necessary, select the Folder

Browser tab from thenavigator.

3. Click Working Directoryto view the current workingdirectory folder in the browser.• Double-clickSampleFunctionalArea.

Page 18: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

4. Right-click the Topic1_Folder folder and select Set WorkingDirectory.

5. ClickWorking Directory from the Common Folders section to displaythe contents of the new working directory in the browser.

Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in thebrowser to navigate to the topic folder, and then right-click andselect Set Working Directory from the browser.

Step 4: Open the file for this procedure.

1. Notice the lab model EXTRUDE_1.PRT is specified in the headerabove.• Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it.

2. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab:• Read the first task.• Perform the first step, which in most cases will be to set the initialdatum display for the procedure or exercise.

• Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.

Step 5: Set the initial datum display options.

1. The instruction for setting the datum display indicates which DatumDisplay types to enable and disable. For example, “Enable only thefollowing Datum Display types: .”

2. To set the datum display, first click the Datum Display drop-downmenu from the In Graphics toolbar.

Page 19: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

3. Next, enable and disable thecheck boxes as necessary. Forexample you could disable theSelect All check box, and thenenable only the desired datumtypes.

4. The model should now appearas shown.

This completes the procedure.

Page 20: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN
Page 21: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module1Using Advanced Assembly Constraints

Module OverviewYou can properly position most components in an assembly using theAutomatic Assembly option or by specifically applying basic constraint typessuch as Mate, Align, or Insert. In some situations however, these basicconstraints do not work or are not efficient to use. In these more complex orunique situations, it is helpful to apply more advanced constraints to positioncomponents in your assembly.

In this module, you will learn how to use Creo Parametric's advancedassembly constraints for positioning components in an assembly.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Assemble a component using the Fix constraint.• Use Coincident to constrain components using the two coordinate systems.• Use Coincident to constrain components using a point on a line.• Use Coincident to constrain components using a point on a surface.• Use Coincident to constrain components using an edge on a surface.• Use Coincident to constrain components using a point on a point.• Use auto constrain to constrain components using a tangency.• Configure constraint sets with parameters.

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 1

Page 22: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Constraining Components using FixThe Fix constraint enables you to maintain a component'sposition even when it has not been fully constrained.

Figure 1 – Packaged Control ArmFigure 2 – Packaged Symbol

in Model Tree

Figure 3 – Fixed Control ArmFigure 4 – Packaged Symbol

Removed

Constraining Components using FixUse the Fix constraint to maintain the current position of a component thathas not been fully constrained. This is helpful in cases where a component ispartially constrained but the final degree of freedom is not explicitly defined.In the figure shown, the ball end of the control arm is mated to the bottomof the housing socket but the final orientation is not defined. After movingthe control arm to a random position, you can apply the Fix constraint tolock that position.

Common Uses for the Fix ConstraintYou can use the Fix constraint when you have intentionally assembled acomponent into position without fully constraining that position. The Fixconstraint locks the component into the current position so that it does notmove while you are working with other components in the design.

Module 1 | Page 2 © 2012 PTC

Page 23: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Constraining Components using Fix

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Assembly\Fix PIVOT_CONTROL_FIX.ASM

Task 1: Position the PIVOT_ARM.PRT and lock it in place using the Fixconstraint.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, notice the

Packaged Component iconnext to PIVOT_ARM.PRT.This icon indicates that thecomponent is packaged orpartially constrained.

3. Edit the definition ofPIVOT_ARM.PRT. Notice inthe dashboard that the constraintSTATUS is also shown asPartially Constrained.

4. Press CTRL+ALT andmiddle-click to move thecomponent in its remainingdegrees of freedom.You can move the component toany position.

5. After positioning the component, right-click and select NewConstraint in the graphics window.

6. In the dashboard, select Fixfrom the drop-down list.

7. Notice that the constraintSTATUS is now FullyConstrained.

8. Click Complete Component .

You can also apply the Fix constraint to your model by right-clickingin the graphics window. The Fix option is located just below the Newconstraint in the pop-up menu.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 3

Page 24: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Constraining Two Coordinate Systems usingCoincidentThe Coincident constraint enables you to position a componentin an assembly by aligning coordinate systems.

Figure 1 – The Coord Sys Constraint

Figure 2 – Select Two CoordinateSystems

Figure 3 – Coordinate SystemsAxes are Aligned

Constraining Two Coordinate Systems using CoincidentYou may use the Coincident constraint to position a component in anassembly by aligning its coordinate system with a coordinate system in theassembly. You position the component by aligning any corresponding axesof the selected coordinate systems.

Because each of the three coordinate system axes are aligned, only onecoordinate system on each part or assembly is required to fully constrain acomponent.

During the assembly process, you can select coordinate systems in oneof the following four ways:

• From the graphics window.• From the model tree.• Using the Search tool.• Creating them on-the-fly.

Module 1 | Page 4 © 2012 PTC

Page 25: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Common Uses for the Coincident Constraint Using TwoCoordinate SystemsYou can use the Coincident constraint on two coordinate systems in a varietyof situations, some of which are as follows:

• In an assembly created using top-down design techniques, componentposition is often defined using coordinate systems prior to completion ofcomponent designs.

• In some industries, it is common to create designs using a singlecommon coordinate system. You can use coordinate systems to positioncomponents in the design's common coordinate system.

• When you position components in complicated orientations defined bymultiple offsets, angles, and cylindrical or spherical coordinate positions.

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 5

Page 26: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Constraining Two Coordinate Systemsusing Coincident

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Assembly\Coordinate_Systems PIVOT_CONTROL.ASM

Task 1: Position the PIVOT_ARM.PRT using a Coord Sys constraint.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .2. Edit the definition of PIVOT_ARM.PRT. Notice the constraint STATUS

is No Constraints.

3. In the dashboard, selectCoincident from thedrop-down list.

4. Select both coordinate systemsnamed ARM_ASSY_REF.

5. Notice that the component snapsto its new location and theconstraint STATUS is now FullyConstrained.

6. Click Complete Component .

Because a coordinate system defines orientation in the X, Y, andZ directions, only one coordinate system Coincident constraint isrequired to fully define a component's position.

Module 1 | Page 6 © 2012 PTC

Page 27: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Change the orientation of the PIVOT_ARM.PRT.

1. In the model tree, click Settings

> Tree Filters....2. Under Display, select the

Features, Placement folderand Annotations check boxes.

3. Click OK.4. In the model tree, right-click

the coordinate systemARM_ASSY_REF and selectEdit.

5. Double-click the 25 degree Xvalue. Edit the value to –25 andpress ENTER.

6. Click Regenerate from theOperations group.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 7

Page 28: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Constraining a Point on a Line using CoincidentThe point on line constraint enables you to position a componentby fixing a point or vertex onto an edge, axis, or datum curve.

Figure 1 – Select Vertex and Curve

Figure 2 – Point on Edge Constraint Figure 3 – Vertex on Curve Position

Constraining a Point on a Line using CoincidentCoincident can be used to constrain a point on a line or a point or vertex to anedge, axis, or datum curve. In the figure, the vertex at the end of the pushpin is constrained to the curve in the slider model. As the slider moves, thepush pin follows the curve.

Coincident Constraint Common Uses for a Point on LineCoincident is used on a point on line constraint in a variety of situations,some of which are as follows:

• To position a contact location between a point and a path, defined bya curve or edge.

• To constrain a component vertex onto a model edge.• To assemble a component to framework or skeleton geometry.

Module 1 | Page 8 © 2012 PTC

Page 29: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Constraining a Point on a Line usingCoincident

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Assembly\Point_on_Line PNT_ON_LINE.ASM

Task 1: Position the FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT using a Point on Lineconstraint.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Edit the definition of FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT. Notice that because

the vertical orientation of the component has not been defined, theconstraint STATUS is Partially Constrained.

3. Select the vertex at the end ofthe FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRTand Curve:F6 from theFIXTURE_SLIDE.PRT.

It is important that Curve Feature 6, not the model edge, is selectedas the assembly reference. Because this curve is a CompositeCurve, the Coincident constraint remains connected along its entirelength as it transitions from one entity to another.

4. Notice that the component snapsto its new location and theconstraint STATUS is now FullyConstrained.

5. Click Complete Component .

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 9

Page 30: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Pattern the FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT and edit the assembly.

1. In the model tree, right-click theFIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT andselect Pattern.

2. Click Complete Component .

3. In the model tree, right-clickFIXTURE_SLIDE.PRT andselect Edit.

4. Double-click the 5 value. Edit thevalue to –20 and press ENTER.

5. Click Regenerate from theOperations group.Notice that because ofthe new constraint, theFIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRTstays connected to the curve asthe slide moves.

This completes the procedure.

Module 1 | Page 10 © 2012 PTC

Page 31: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Constraining a Point on a Surface usingCoincidentUsing Coincident with a Point on a Surface enables you toposition a component by fixing a point or vertex onto a surfaceor datum plane.

Figure 2 – Select Vertex andSurfaceFigure 1 – The Automatic Constraint

Figure 3 – Point on Surface Position

Constraining a Point on a Surface using CoincidentCoincident can be used to constrain a point on a surface. You can use part orassembly datum points, surface features, datum planes, or solid surfaces forconstraint references.

Coincident Constraint Common Uses for a Point on SurfaceCoincident is used on a point and surface in a variety of situations, some ofwhich are as follows:

• To position a contact location between a component vertex and the surfaceof another component.

• To fix a component datum point to a design datum or surface.

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 11

Page 32: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Constraining a Point on a Surface usingCoincident

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Assembly\Point_on_Surface CARBURETOR_PNT.ASM

Task 1: Position the IDLE_SCREW_PNT.PRT using a Coincidentconstraint.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Edit the definition of IDLE_SCREW_PNT.PRT. Notice that because

the depth position of the component has not been defined, theconstraint STATUS is Partially Constrained.

3. Select the vertex at the end ofthe IDLE_SCREW_PNT.PRTand the facing surface onCONTROL_ARM.PRT.

4. Notice that the component snapsto its new location and theconstraint STATUS is now FullyConstrained.

5. Click Complete Component .

6. From the In Graphics toolbar,

activate Named Views andselect TOP.

7. In the model tree, right-clickCONTROL_ARM.PRT andselect Edit.

8. Double-click the 65 value. Editthe value to 90 and pressENTER.

Module 1 | Page 12 © 2012 PTC

Page 33: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

9. Click Regenerate from theOperations group.

10. Notice how theIDLE_SCREW_PNT.PRTmaintains contact with theCONTROL_ARM.PRT andmoves accordingly.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 13

Page 34: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Constraining an Edge on a Surface usingCoincidentThe Edge on Surface constraint enables you to position acomponent by fixing a linear edge to a planar surface or datumplane.

Figure 1 - Select Surface and Edge Figure 2 - Edge on SurfaceConstraint

Constraining an Edge on a Surface using CoincidentUse the Coincident constraint to constrain a linear edge to a planar surface.The surface reference can be a datum plane, surface feature, or solid surface.

Coincident Constraint Common Uses for an Edge on a SurfaceCoincident is used with an edge on surface constraint in a variety ofsituations. The most common situation is when you place the edge of acomponent onto the surface of another component. This method is especiallyhelpful when you design fixtures and sheetmetal products, because bothproducts typically contain many linear edges and planar surfaces.

Module 1 | Page 14 © 2012 PTC

Page 35: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Constraining an Edge on a Surface usingCoincident

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Assembly\Edge_on_Surface RATCHET.ASM

Task 1: Position the RATCHET_ARM.PRT using an Edge on Surfaceconstraint.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Edit the definition of RATCHET_ARM.PRT. Notice that because the

rotational orientation of the component has not been defined, theconstraint STATUS is Partially Constrained.

3. Press CTRL+ALT andmiddle-click to spin thecomponent so that it is closeto the final assembly positionshown.

4. Select the vertical edge ofRATCHET_ARM.PRT and theflat surface on the hex geometryof RATCHET.PRT.

5. Notice that the component snapsto its new location and theconstraint STATUS is now FullyConstrained.

6. Click Complete Component .

This Coincident constraint requires a linear edge or a curve to lie ona planar surface. Because the outer walls of the RATCHET.PRTare drafted, the vertical edge on the RATCHET_ARM.PRT couldnot be constrained to any of the outer walls.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 15

Page 36: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Constraining a Point on a Point using CoincidentUsing Coincident with a Point on a Point enables you to positiona component by fixing a point or vertex onto another point orvertex.

Figure 1 – Select Point and Point

Figure 2 – Point on Point Constraint Figure 3 – Constrained Spring

Constraining a Point on a Point using CoincidentYou can use the Coincident constraint point on point option to positiona point or vertex with another point or vertex. In the figure, the spring ispositioned by constraining points at the attachment locations of the spring tothe corresponding attachment points on the clutch shoes.

Coincident Constraint Common Uses for a Point on a PointCoincident is used with a point on a point constraint in a variety of situations,some of which are as follows:

• You can control component positions by aligning a vertex on onecomponent with a vertex on another.

• You can use the point on point constraint when you assemble componentsto framework or skeletal type geometry that consists mostly of datum typefeatures.

• You can easily define attachment geometry without planar or cylindricalfeatures using datum points and then positioning the points using the pointon point constraint.

Module 1 | Page 16 © 2012 PTC

Page 37: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Constraining a Point on a Point usingCoincident

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Assembly\Point_on_Point CLUTCH.ASM

Task 1: Position the CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT using two Point on Pointconstraints.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .2. Edit the definition of CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT. Notice the constraint

STATUS is Partially Constrained.

3. Select datum point PNT1 onthe CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT anddatum point SPRING1 on theCLUTCH_SHOE_L.PRT.

4. Press CTRL+ALT andmiddle-click to spin thecomponent into a better position.

5. Right Click and select NewConstraint.

6. In the dashboard selectCoincident from the drop-downlist.

7. Select point PNT2 on theCLUTCH_SPRING.PRTand SPRING1 on theCLUTCH_SHOE_R.PRT.

8. Notice that the component snapsto its new location and theconstraint STATUS is now FullyConstrained.

9. Click Complete Component .

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 17

Page 38: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating a Tangent Constraint using AutoConstrainThe Tangent constraint enables you to position a component byconstraining two surfaces at their point of tangency.

Figure 2 – Initial Contact PositionFigure 1 – The Tangent Constraint

Figure 3 – Position After Edit

Creating a Tangent Constraint using Auto ConstrainThe Tangent constraint can be selected automatically or manually. It is usedto position the contact point of two surfaces at their point of tangency. Thisplacement constraint causes the contacting surfaces to face each other. It isimportant to understand that this constraint does not align them.

Common Uses for the Tangent ConstraintYou can use the Tangent constraint in a variety of situations, some of whichare as follows.

• A contact point between a cam and its actuator.• Any design in which a cylindrical, spherical, or conical surface has atangent contact with a planar surface.

The Tangent constraint creates references from one surface patchto another. The Tangent constraint does not automatically transitionfrom one surface patch to another to show cam and actuatortype motion. You can address more complicated assembly casesusing datum features within Creo Parametric or with mechanismconstraint types in Creo Mechanism Dynamics Extension.

Module 1 | Page 18 © 2012 PTC

Page 39: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating a Tangent Constraint usingAuto Constrain

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Assembly\Tangent CARBURETOR_TAN.ASM

Task 1: Position the CONTROL_ARM.PRT using a Tangent constraint.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Edit the definition of CONTROL_ARM.PRT. Notice that because the

rotational orientation of the component has not been defined, theconstraint STATUS is Partially Constrained.

3. Select the ball end ofthe IDLE_SCREW.PRTand the facing surface onCONTROL_ARM.PRT.

Auto constrain has Tangentselected for the

constraint type.

4. Notice that the component snapsto its new location and theconstraint STATUS is now FullyConstrained.

5. Click Complete Component .

6. From the In Graphics toolbar,

activate Named Views andclick TOP.

7. In the model tree, right-clickIDLE_SCREW.PRT and selectEdit.

8. Double-click the 0 value. Edit thevalue to 6 and press ENTER.

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 19

Page 40: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

9. Click Regenerate from theOperations group.

10. Notice how theCONTROL_ARM.PRTmaintains tangency with theIDLE_SCREW.PRT and movesaccordingly.

This completes the procedure.

Module 1 | Page 20 © 2012 PTC

Page 41: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Configuring Constraint Sets with ParametersYou can create multiple constraint sets for a given component.

Multiple constraint sets

• Alternate assembly positions• Parameter: PTC_CONSTRAINT_SET– Active set by default– Edit to alternate set

• Can be varied in Family TableFigure 1 – Constraint Set in

Model Tree

Figure 2 – First Constraint Set Figure 3 – Second Constraint Set

Configuring Constraint Sets with ParametersYou can create multiple constraint sets for a given component, as shownin Figure 1. The constraint sets can be enabled or disabled to assemblecomponents into alternate positions. When more than one constraint set iscreated, a feature parameter called PTC_CONSTRAINT_SET is createdfor the component, and the PTC_CONSTRAINT_SET parameter is set asthe active constraint set by default.

You can edit the parameter value to activate an alternate constraint set. Theparameter can then be varied in a family table to create different variations,as shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3.

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 21

Page 42: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Configuring Constraint Sets withParameters

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Constraint_Sets DRILL_CHUCK.ASM

Task 1: Configure a second constraint set.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters.3. Enable Placement folder in the Model Tree Items dialog box and

click OK.4. Right-click KEY_BASE.PRT in the model tree and select Edit

Definition.5. Select the Placement tab in the dashboard.

6. Select Set1 and disable Set Enabled.7. Click New Set.8. Select the set named Set6 and type Set2 in the Set Name field.9. Drag KEY_BASE.PRT out of the model.

10. Click 3D Dragger in the dashboard to disable the 3D Dragger.

11. Select the surfaces shown.

12. Click New Constraint.13. Select the surfaces shown.

Module 1 | Page 22 © 2012 PTC

Page 43: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

14. Select the first constraint, AngleOffset.

15. Edit the Constraint Type toCoincident and click Flip.

16. Click Complete Component .

17. In the model tree, click Settings

> Tree Columns.18. Edit the Type to Feat Params.19. Type PTC_CONSTRAINT_SET

in the Name field, click AddColumn , and edit the Widthto 14.

20. Click OK.

21. In the model tree, edit Set2 toSet1.

22. Click Regenerate .

Task 2: Configure the constraint set parameter in a Family Table.

1. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.

2. Click Family Table from the Model Intent group.

3. Click Insert Instance in the Family Table dialog box.4. Edit the instance name to DRILL_CHUCK_SET2.

5. Click Add Columns .6. Select Parameter from the Add Item section of the Family Items

dialog box.7. Select Component from the Look In drop-down list and select

KEY_BASE.PRT.8. Select the PTC_CONSTRAINT_SET parameter.9. Click Insert Selected and then click Close.10. Click OK in the Family Items dialog box.

© 2012 PTC Module 1 | Page 23

Page 44: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

11. Edit the instances as shown.

12. Select the DRILL_CHUCK_SET2 instance row and clickPreview Instance .

13. Click Close.14. Click OK.

This completes the procedure.

Module 1 | Page 24 © 2012 PTC

Page 45: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module2Creating and Using Component Interfaces

Module OverviewComponent interfaces are user-defined sets of constraints and referencesthat are stored with a model and used to quickly place that componentduring an assembly operation. After you define an interface, you can use itwhenever you place the component in an assembly.

Adding component interfaces to an organization's standard componentsincreases assembly productivity, enabling faster and more accuratecomponent placement.

The same functionality used in component interfaces is also used to placecomponents using Copy and Paste, Repeat, and Auto Place.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create and use a placement component interface.• Create and use a receiving component interface.• Create a component interface using the Save As Interface dialog box.• Auto place components in an assembly.• Copy and paste components within assemblies.• Repeat the placement of components within an assembly.

© 2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 1

Page 46: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Understanding Component InterfacesComponent interface features contain stored constraints andreferences used to assemble components more efficiently.

Elements of a component interface:

• Interface Name• Interface Template• Interface Type, Placing orReceiving

• Constraints and References

Figure 1 – Constraints andReferences on the Model

Figure 2 – Constraints andReferences in the Model Tree Figure 3 – Constraints and

References in the Dialog Box

Understanding Component InterfacesComponent interfaces are user-defined sets of constraints stored in a modeland used to quickly place components during assembly operations. Aftera component interface is defined, you can reuse it during any assemblyoperation.You can add Component Interface features to part or assembly models. Likeany feature, component interfaces appear in the model tree, have their ownidentifying icon, and can be edited.

Elements of a Component Interface

A unique set of elements are used to define a component interface.

• Interface Name – Used to identify andselect the component interface.

• Interface Template – Used to createinterfaces with mechanism connectionsets.

• Placement/Receiving Interface –Determines if the component interfaceis used for placing the component orreceiving another component.The Either type interface can be used foreither placing or receiving.

Figure 4 – Elements

Module 2 | Page 2 © 2012 PTC

Page 47: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Constraints – Each component interfacecontains a set of predefined constraintsthat are applied when using the interface.

• References – Each component interfacecontains selected geometry, correspondingto each constraint in the interface. Figure 5 – Constraints and

References

• Dependent – Select Dependent to ensure that Offset types (Coincident,Orient, Offset) and orientations (Mate, Align) cannot be changed.

If you delete a component interface, any components referencingthe interface fail to regenerate and you are required to selectnew references.

Creating a Component Interface

Component interfaces are created explicitly using the Component Interfacedialog box or on-the-fly by saving a component's existing set of assemblyconstraints.

Figure 6 – Dialog Box Figure 7 – Save as Interface

Placing Components using Component Interfaces

When placing a component containing an interface, the placementdashboard presents you with the following placement options:

• Interface to Geom – Place a componentcontaining an interface in an assembly withouta receiving interface. You are required to selectmatching references from the assembly. Figure 8 – Interface

to Geom

© 2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 3

Page 48: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Interface to Interface – Place a componentcontaining an interface in an assemblycontaining a receiving interface. To positioncomponents, you click one or more whitecircles. Each circle represents a receivinginterface.

Figure 9 – Interfaceto Interface

• Multiple Interfaces – When the componentbeing placed contains multiple componentinterfaces, the default is used unless you selectanother interface from the drop-down list.

Figure 10 – MultipleInterfaces

• Place Manually – Click Place Manuallyfrom the dashboard to assemble a componentwithout using an existing interface.

Figure 11 – PlaceManually

Module 2 | Page 4 © 2012 PTC

Page 49: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Using a Placing Component InterfaceYou use a Placing Component interface when inserting acomponent into an assembly.

Placing Component Interface:

• Interface Name• Component Constraints• Component References

Figure 2 – As Seen in the Model Tree

Figure 1 – Dialog Box

Figure 3 – References andConstraints

Understanding Placing InterfacesYou use Placing Component interfaces to save constraints and associatedreferences that you typically use to assemble a component. Each time youassemble that component, the constraints and references of the componentinterface are preselected, enabling a more efficient assembly process.These interfaces are typically added to standard hardware components sothat you can easily and quickly place them in assemblies.The Either type interface can also be used as a Placing interface. TheEither type interface behaves as a Placing interface when it is inserted intoan assembly. The Either type also behaves as a Receiving interface whencomponents are added to it. While flexible, this behavior may or may notmeet your needs.

Placing Interface Feature LocationBy default, both the Placing and Either component interfaces are createdin the Interfaces folder, found in the footer of the model tree. To move aninterface from the footer, select it in the model tree, right-click, and selectMove from footer.

Designate DefaultIf a model contains more than one Placing or Either interface, the first onecreated is the default interface. The default interface is the interface first usedwhen the component is placed in an assembly. You can select the otherinterfaces of a component from the drop-down list in the assembly dashboard.To designate another interface as the default, select the feature in the modeltree, right-click, and select Set Default.

© 2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 5

Page 50: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Using a Placing InterfaceWhen you assemble a component with a Placing interface in a modelthat does not contain receiving interfaces, the constraints and associatedreferences of the component interface are automatically selected. This isan Interface to Geometry assembly, and you are only required to selectcorresponding reference geometry from the assembly model.

If a component contains multiple interfaces, select the interface you wouldlike to use from the interface list in the assembly dashboard.

If you do not want to use any of a component's interfaces, select PlaceManually from the dashboard.

Module 2 | Page 6 © 2012 PTC

Page 51: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Using a Placing Component Interface

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Assembly\Interface_Placing PLACING_BOLT.PRT

Task 1: Create a Placing Component interface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, click Settings

> Tree Filters....3. Under Display, select the

Features, Placement folderand Annotations check boxes.

4. Click OK.

5. Click Component Interfacefrom the Model Intent group.• Type insert_mate as theinterface name.

• Notice the Interface Templatedrop-down list contains onlyMechanism connection sets.

• Select Placing from thePlacement/Receiving Interfacedrop-down list.

At any time, you can edit the interface properties defined byclicking the interface name in the upper-left corner of the dialogbox.

6. Select the cylindrical surfaceof PLACING_BOLT.PRT as anInsert reference.

7. Select the bottom of the bolthead as a Mate reference.

8. Click Complete Feature .

Both Coincident constraints were created using the Automaticconstraint type. You can select specific constraint types from theConstraint Type drop-down list.

© 2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 7

Page 52: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

9. In the model tree, expand theFooter and INTERFACESgroups. Observe theINSERT_MATE feature.

10. Expand the INSERT_MATEfeature and notice the feature’slisted constraints.

Task 2: Insert a component using its placing interface.

1. Click Open . Select PLACING_INTF.ASM and click Open.

2. Click Assemble from the Component group.3. In the Open dialog box, select PLACING_BOLT.PRT and click Open.

In the ribbon, notice that because PLACING_BOLT.PRT containsa Component interface, the placement method has defaulted toPlace Using Interface.

4. Select a surface in the upper-lefthole in PLACING_INTF.PRT asthe assembly's Insert reference.

5. Select the top surface ofPLACING_INTF.PRT as theassembly's Mate reference.

6. Click Complete Component .

Module 2 | Page 8 © 2012 PTC

Page 53: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

7. Using the previous steps, placethree additional bolts into theassembly.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 9

Page 54: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Using a Receiving Component InterfaceYou use a Receiving type component interface to receive andautomatically place components containing Placing interfaces.

Receiving component interfaces:

• Automatic Interface to Interface assembly.• Select multiple receiving interfaces to place multiple components.

Figure 1 – White Circles Represent Receiving Interfaces

Using a Receiving Component InterfaceReceiving type interfaces automatically receive and position componentscontaining Placing or Either type interfaces.You typically add Receiving interfaces to components that routinely havemodels assembled to them that contain component interfaces. These includemodels with holes that receive bolts, bolts that receive nuts, washers, andso on.The Either type interface can also be used as a Receiving interface. TheEither type interface behaves as a Receiving interface when components areassembled to it. The Either type interface behaves as a Placing interfacewhen inserted into an assembly. While flexible, this behavior may or maynot meet your needs.

Receiving Interface Feature LocationBy default, Receiving component interfaces are placed in the model treealong with other features and components. Unlike Placing interfaces, you donot create them in the footer of the model tree. To move a Receiving interfaceto the footer, right-click it in the model tree and select Move to footer.

Designate DefaultUnlike Placing or Either type interfaces, you cannot designate a Receivinginterface as a default component interface. This is because all receivinginterfaces are active when you place a component.

Using Receiving InterfacesWhen you insert a component with a Placing or Either type interface intoan assembly with a Receiving interface, Creo Parametric defaults to the

Module 2 | Page 10 © 2012 PTC

Page 55: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Interface to Interface assembly method. Small white circles appear inthe assembly. Each white circle represents a Receiving interface in theassembly. Select one or more of the white circles to place a component atthat interface location.

If a component being assembled does not contain a Placing or Eitherinterface, the Receiving interface is not recognized and cannot be referenced.

If you do not want to use the Receiving interface, edit the assembly methodto Interface to Geom and select assembly references as required.

If you do not want to use interfaces for assembly, click Place Manuallyfrom the dashboard.

© 2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 11

Page 56: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Using a Receiving Component Interface

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Assembly\Interface_Receiving RECEIVE_INTF.ASM

Task 1: Create a Receiving Component interface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters....3. Under Display, select the Features, Placement folder and

Annotations check boxes.4. Click OK.5. In the model tree, right-click RECEIVE_INTF.PRT and select Open.

6. Click Component Interfacefrom the Model Intent group.• Type insert_mate_hex as theInterface Name.

• Select Receiving from thePlacement/Receiving Interfacedrop-down list.

• Click Yes from the RemoveDefault warning dialog box.

You receive the Remove Default warning because ReceivingComponent interfaces cannot be set to default.

7. Select the cylindrical surface ofthe hole in the lower-left cornerof RECEIVE_INTF.PRT as anInsert reference.

8. Select the top surface of themodel as a Coincident reference.

9. Click Complete Feature .

Both Coincident constraints were created using the Automaticconstraint type. You can select specific constraint types from theConstraint Type drop-down list.

Module 2 | Page 12 © 2012 PTC

Page 57: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

10. In the model tree, expand theINSERT_MATE_HEX feature.

Notice that ReceivingComponent interfaces arenot located in the modelfooter.

11. In the model tree, right-click the INSERT_MATE_HEX componentinterface and select Pattern.

12. Click Complete Feature to complete the Reference pattern.

13. Click Close .

Task 2: Insert a component using an Interface to Interface placement.

1. Click Assemble from the Component group.2. In the Open dialog box, select RECEIVE_BOLT.PRT and click Open.

3. You immediately notice eightsmall white circles, eachrepresenting a ReceivingComponent interface.Place the component three timesby clicking the interfaces shownin the figure.

4. In the dashboard, select INSERT_MATE_OFFSET from theComponent Interface drop-down list.This selection will change the interface used to place the highlightedcomponent.

The RECEIVE_BOLT.PRT model contains two ComponentInterfaces, INSERT_MATE and INSERT_MATE_OFFSET. TheINSERT_MATE interface is the default interface.

© 2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 13

Page 58: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

5. Click on the fourth interfaceshown.This component is alsoplaced using the selectedINSERT_MATE_OFFSETinterface.

6. Click Complete Component .

This completes the procedure.

Module 2 | Page 14 © 2012 PTC

Page 59: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating a Component Interface using the Saveas Interface Dialog BoxYou can save assembly constraints and references to acomponent interface using the Save as Interface dialog box.

Save as Interface:

• Efficient• Reuse

Figure 1 – Save as Interface Dialog Box

Creating a Component Interface using the Save as InterfaceDialog BoxYou can save the constraints and references used to assemble a componentto a component interface feature using the Save as Interface dialog box.

With the assembly dashboard open, right-click in the graphics window andselect Save as Interface. This opens the Save as Interface dialog box,enabling you to create the Either type interface.

You can save interfaces by editing the definition of a component and thensaving its interface during the initial assembly process, after all constraintsand references have been defined, or at a later time.

Save as Interface TypeAn interface saved using the Save as Interface dialog box is created as anEither type interface. If you need to change it to a Placing or Receivinginterface, you can edit the definition of the interface to do so.

© 2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 15

Page 60: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating a Component Interface usingthe Save as Interface Dialog Box

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Assembly\Interface_Save-As SAVE_AS_INTF.ASM

Task 1: Insert a component and save the interface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click Assemble from theComponent group.

3. In the Open dialog box, selectINTF_CAP.PRT and click Open.

4. Select a cylindrical surfaceon INTF_CAP.PRT and asurface in the lower-left hole ofSAVE_AS_INTF.PRT to create aCoincident constraint.

5. Press CTRL+ALT, right-click,and drag INTF_CAP.PRT up andout of SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT, ifrequired.

6. Select the small surface at thebottom of the sphere-shapedhead of INTF_CAP.PRTand the top surface ofSAVE_AS_INTF.PRT to create aCoincident constraint.

7. Right-click in the graphics window and select Save as Interface.8. Type insert_mate in the Name field of the dialog box and click OK.9. Click Complete Component .

Task 2: Insert the cap model again using the new component interface.

1. Click Assemble from the Component group.2. In the Open dialog box, select INTF_CAP.PRT and click Open.

Module 2 | Page 16 © 2012 PTC

Page 61: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

3. Using the newly createdcomponent interface, selectthe lower-right hole inSAVE_AS_INTF.PRT as theassembly's first Coincidentreference.

4. Select the top ofSAVE_AS_INTF.PRT as theassembly's second Coincidentreference.

5. Click Complete Component .

Task 3: Edit the interface to a Placing type component interface.

1. In the model tree, right-click the top INTF_CAP.PRT and select Open.2. In the model tree, expand the Footer and INTERFACES groups.3. Right-click the INSERT_MATE feature and select Edit Definition.

4. Click INSERT_MATE in theupper-left corner of theComponent Interface dialogbox.

5. Select Placing from thePlacement/Receiving Interfacedrop-down list.

6. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 17

Page 62: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Auto Placing ComponentsYou can position components containing component interfacesin an assembly using Auto Place.

Auto Place dialog box:

• Screen Point• Search Scope• Locations Found• Locations Selected• Preferences

Figure 2 – Auto PlaceButton

Figure 1 – Auto Place Dialog Box

Understanding Auto PlaceThe Auto Place functionality in Creo Parametric positions a componentcontaining a component interface into an assembly based on a selectedscreen point location and search scope.

Auto Place WorkflowsThere are two basic workflows you can follow when positioning componentsusing Auto Place.• Before selecting any references, click Auto Place in the assemblydashboard. This opens the Auto Place dialog box enabling you to do thefollowing:– Select a screen point for Creo Parametric to begin searching for a

suitable assembly location.– Select components limiting the search scope for Creo Parametric to use

when searching for a suitable assembly location.– After locating the correct position(s), use Add Item to select the position.

You can select multiple locations for assembly.• Preselect components to limit the search scope of the Auto Place positionsearch. In this case, as soon as you insert a component, the Auto Placedialog box opens with the search scope model(s) already listed.– Select a screen point for Creo Parametric to begin searching for a

suitable assembly location.– The search scope is already defined with this workflow.– After locating the correct position(s), use Add Item to select the position.

You can select multiple locations for assembly.

Module 2 | Page 18 © 2012 PTC

Page 63: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Auto Place PreferencesYou can adjust placement search preferences at any time during theoperation.

• You can adjust the maximum number of locations. By default, CreoParametric searches for and finds five possible assembly locations.Increasing this amount enables you to find more assembly locations, but italso slows down the search process.

• You can also increase or decrease the search area around the selectedscreen point to effect performance as well as the number of locations found.

Best PracticesWith all but the smallest assemblies, it is important to limit the search scopeto a component or two. An assembly-wide search scope increases searchtime and may not provide good results.

© 2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 19

Page 64: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Auto Placing Components

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Assembly\Auto-Place AUTO-PLACE.ASM

Task 1: Place a component using Auto Place.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click Assemble in theComponent group. SelectBOLT_6-20.PRT and click Open.

3. Click Auto Place from thedashboard, then click theleft hole to auto place thecomponent.

4. In the Auto Place dialog box,select each of the locations foundto identify the correct placementlocation.

5. Select the correct location andclick Add Item in the AutoPlace dialog box. Then clickClose.

6. Click Complete Component .

Task 2: Auto place additional components, limiting the search scope toa selected component.

1. Select GEARBOX_REAR_AUTO.PRT.

2. Click Assemble . Select BOLT_6-20.PRT and click Open.

Because GEARBOX_REAR_AUTO.PRT was preselected, theAuto Place dialog box automatically opens, listing the first fivepotential placement locations found in the part.

Module 2 | Page 20 © 2012 PTC

Page 65: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

3. In the Auto Place dialog box,select and review each of thelocations found.

Notice that GEARBOX_REAR_AUTO.PRT isspecified in the Auto Placedialog box as an item todefine the search scope.

4. If the correct location is not inthe list of five, click Preferences.Edit the Max number of locationsfrom 5 to 20.

5. Begin selecting each locationstarting at number 6. Stop whenyou have identified the locationthat positions the bolt in eitherthe center or right side holeshown in the figure.

6. Select the first correct location,and click Add Item in theAuto Place dialog box.

7. Review the remaining locationsto find the bolt positioned in theremaining hole. Click Add Item

in the Auto Place dialog box,then click Close.

8. Click Complete Component .

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 21

Page 66: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Copying and Pasting ComponentsYou can copy and then paste a component, its placementconstraints, and its references.

Copy and Paste:

• Component• Constraints• References

Figure 1 – Pasting a Component into Position

Copying and Pasting ComponentsYou can copy and then paste components within the current assembly or intoother assemblies. One of the most efficient methods for placing a componentmultiple times within an assembly is to use Copy and Paste. This is also anefficient method for copying a component from one assembly into another.

When you copy a component, the constraints and references used to placeit are also copied. When you paste the component into an assembly, youalso paste the constraints and references with it, enabling you to place thecomponent by selecting corresponding assembly references.

Copy and Paste Component WorkflowUse the following workflow to copy and paste components within an assembly.

• Select the component to copy and either click Edit > Copy or use thekeyboard shortcut CTRL+C to copy it.

• Paste the component into the desired assembly by clicking Edit > Pasteor use the keyboard shortcut CTRL+V. An unconstrained copy of thecomponent appears in the graphics area.

• Select assembly references corresponding to those in the component.

Best PracticesCopy and Paste is a very efficient method to use when copying a singlecomponent in an assembly multiple times. Depending on your situation, theRepeat functionality may be even more efficient.

Module 2 | Page 22 © 2012 PTC

Page 67: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Copying and Pasting Components

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Component_Operations\Copy_Paste COPY_PASTE.ASM

Task 1: Copy and paste a component within the assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select BOLT_6-25.PRT.3. Press CTRL+C to copy the

component.4. Press CTRL+V to paste the

component.5. Select a surface in the middle

hole as the assembly's firstCoincident reference.

6. Select the front surface as theassembly's second Coincidentreference.

7. Click Complete Component .

8. Press CTRL+V again to paste asecond instance of the bolt.

9. Select a surface in the far-righthole as the assembly's firstCoincident reference.

10. Select the front surface as theassembly's second Coincidentreference.

11. Click Complete Component .

© 2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 23

Page 68: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Copy and paste a component to another assembly.

1. Click Open and double-clickCARBURETOR.ASM to openthe assembly.

2. Press CTRL+V to paste thecomponent into the newassembly.

3. Press CTRL+ALT, right-click,and drag the copied bolt to theposition shown in the figure.

4. Select a surface in the left holeas the assembly's first Coincidentreference.

5. Select the front surface as theassembly's second Coincidentreference.

6. Click Complete Component .

This completes the procedure.

Module 2 | Page 24 © 2012 PTC

Page 69: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Repeating Component PlacementYou can use the Repeat Component tool to place a componentmultiple times within an assembly.

Repeat using the model tree.

Repeat using the Repeat Componentdialog box:

• Component• Variable Assembly Refs• Place Component

Figure 1 – Repeat Using theModel Tree

Figure 2 – Repeat ComponentDialog Box

Repeating Component PlacementYou can use the Repeat Component dialog box to quickly place a componentmultiple times throughout an assembly. To open the Repeat Componentdialog box, select the component you want to repeat, then right-click thecomponent and select Repeat.

You can also repeat the placement of a component one time by right-clickingone or more of its constraints in the model tree and then selecting Repeatfrom the shortcut menu.

Using the Repeat Component Dialog BoxThe Repeat Component dialog box contains the following elements used torepeat the placement of a component:

• Component – The component selected prior to opening the RepeatComponent dialog box is listed in the Component section of the dialog box.In the dialog box, you can leave the component selected or select adifferent component to be repeated.

A component must be preselected or the Repeat menu pick isgrayed out.

• Varied Assembly Refs – This field lists all constraints used to place theselected component. Select the constraint that will be different for eachrepeated component placement.For example, when repeating the placement of a bolt into various holes in ablock, you select only the Insert constraint, not the Mate constraint. This is

© 2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 25

Page 70: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

because the bolt will be inserted into different holes, but the head of thebolt will always mate to the same surface.If more than one constraint will vary, press CTRL and select each varyingconstraint.

• Place Component – To repeat a component's placement, click the Addbutton after selecting constraints to vary. As you select new assemblyreferences, components are added to the assembly and listed in the PlaceComponent field.To remove a repeated component, select it in the list and click the Removebutton.

Repeat using the Model TreeTo repeat the placement of a component using the model tree, expand thecomponent’s placement and constraint set nodes. In the constraint setnode, right-click the constraint(s) you wish to repeat and click Repeat fromthe shortcut menu. This opens the component placement dashboard anddisplays the new component in the graphics window, enabling you to selectrequired references for the component’s placement.

Unlike the Repeat Component dialog box that enables you to repeat theplacement of a component multiple times, this technique only enables you torepeat placement one component at a time.

Module 2 | Page 26 © 2012 PTC

Page 71: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Repeating Component Placement

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Component_Operations\Repeat REPEAT.ASM

Task 1: Repeat the placement of a component and vary a single reference.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, click Settings

> Tree Filters....3. Under Display, select the

Placement folder check boxand click OK.

4. In the model tree, right-clickBOLT_5-18.PRT and clickRepeat.

5. In the Variable Assembly Refsfield of the Repeat Componentdialog box, select the firstCoincident reference and clickAdd.

6. Reorient the assembly, asnecessary, to select the threeinside hole surfaces.

7. Click Confirm in the RepeatComponent dialog box tocomplete the assembly of thethree bolts.

© 2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 27

Page 72: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Repeat the placement of a component and vary two references.

1. In the model tree, right-click thelast instance of BOLT_6-25.PRTand click Repeat.

2. In the Variable AssemblyRefs field of the RepeatComponent dialog box, selectboth Coincident references andclick Add.

3. Reorient the assembly and selectthe inner hole surface as the firstcoincident constraint referenceand the front surface as thesecond coincident constraintreference.

4. Click Confirm in the RepeatComponent dialog box tocomplete the assembly of thetwo bolts.

Task 3: Repeat the placement of another component using the model tree.

1. In the model tree, expand the first instance of BOLT_6-25.PRT.2. Expand the Placement node and the Set25 node.3. Right-click the top Coincident constraint and select Repeat.

4. Select the cylindrical surfaceof the hole located at theupper-center of GEARBOX_REAR_REPEAT.PRT, as shownin the figure.

5. Click Complete Component .

Using this method, you canonly repeat one componentat a time.

This completes the procedure.

Module 2 | Page 28 © 2012 PTC

Page 73: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module3Creating and Using Flexible Components

Module OverviewA flexible component readily adapts to new, different, or changingrequirements within an assembly. You can include it in an assemblyin various states. Each flexible state is defined by any combination ofvariable dimensions, features, geometric tolerances, surface finishes, andparameters. For example, a spring can have various compression lengths indifferent places throughout an assembly.

You can define flexibility for any part or sub-assembly and you can use it forevery placement instance of the component.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Add flexibility to a component.• Place flexible components into assemblies.• Use a measured distance to define a flexible dimension.• Add flexibility to components already placed in assemblies.• Add a feature as a flexible item in a model.• Use a measured diameter to define a flexible dimension.• Edit the flexibility of a component in an assembly.• Use flexible parameters.

© 2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 1

Page 74: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Adding Flexibility to a ComponentFlexibility enables selected component items to vary, or “flex,”within an assembly.

Variable Items

• Dimensions• Features• Parameters• Surface Finish• Geometric Tolerances• Components

Figure 1 – Prepare Varied Items

Figure 2 – Free State ContactFigure 3 – Compressed Contact

in Assembly

Understanding FlexibilityComponents such as springs, clips, rubber washers, and so on, all typicallyvary geometrically in their assembled condition. These are called flexiblecomponents. A spring, for example, can have various compression lengthsthroughout an assembly.Creo Parametric enables you to add flexibility to a component by changingthe value of selected component items. Note that this change is only withinthe assembly; the part remains unaltered. You can select dimensions,parameters, surface finishes, geometric tolerances, features, andcomponents as flexible items and vary their values during assembly.

Flexible ItemsTo open the Flexibility: Prepare Varied Items dialog box, click File > Prepare> Model Properties and click change in the Flexible row of the Tools sectionof the Model Properties dialog box. Flexible items are selected in the modeland added to the Flexibility dialog box.• Dimensions – You can select any model dimension as a flexible item.When the component is placed in an assembly, you are given the optionto vary one, none, or all of the flexible dimension values in the dialog box.The following methods can be used to define the flexible value:– By value – Flexible dimension values can be controlled by typing a value

in the New Value field of the dialog box.– Curve Length – Measure a curve length to define the flexible dimension

value.

Module 3 | Page 2 © 2012 PTC

Page 75: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

– Distance – Measure a distance between two entities to define theflexible dimension value.

– Angle – Measure an angle to define the flexible dimension value.– Area – Measure a surface area to define the flexible dimension value.– Diameter – Measure diameter to define the flexible dimension value.

• Geometric Tolerances – You can vary the value of geometric tolerances toensure that a component is not flexed to the breaking point.

• Parameters – You can designate a parameter as flexible and vary the valueupon assembly. This is a powerful tool when used in conjunction withrelations to define known assembly states.

• Surface Finish – You can vary the value of a flexible Surface Finishsymbol within an assembly to meet the varying finish conditions at differentlocations within an assembly.

• Features – You can suppress and resume flexible features within anassembly.

• Components – You can suppress and resume components within anassembly. You only see the Components tab when adding flexibility toan assembly model.

Best PracticesYou should always test your model to ensure that it will regeneratesuccessfully using the same dimension values and feature statuses that areused when it is placed in an assembly as a flexible component. To test themodel, edit the value and status of all flexible items to ensure they regeneratesuccessfully at those values.

© 2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 3

Page 76: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Adding Flexibility to a Component

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Component_Operations\Flexible_Adding ADDING_FLEX.ASM

Task 1: Add a flexible dimension.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to access the Model

Properties dialog box. In the Tools section, click change in theFlexible row.

3. In the model tree, select ADDING_FLEX.PRT.

4. In the Flexibility dialog box,select the Dimensions tab, ifnecessary.

5. In the graphics window, selectADDING_FLEX.PRT.

6. Select the 60 degree dimension.7. Select Add to add it to the list

of variable dimensions.

Task 2: Add a flexible feature.

1. In the Flexibility dialog box,select the Features tab.

2. Select the topmost section of thepart.

3. Select Add to add it to the listof features.

4. Click OK in the Flexibility dialogbox.

5. In the Tools section, click Expand in the Flexible row to verify thatone flexible feature has been defined.

This completes the procedure.

Module 3 | Page 4 © 2012 PTC

Page 77: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Placing Flexible Components in an AssemblyWhen placing a flexible component, you can use or ignore theflexible definition.

Placing Flexible Components

• Confirm the use of flexibledefinition.

• Type values for variableitems.

Figure 1 – Type Values for Variable Items

Placing Flexible ComponentsPlacing a flexible component is not much different than placing a non-flexiblecomponent. There are just two additional steps added to the process.• Click Yes in the Confirm dialog box, to confirm that you want to use theflexibility defined in the component.

• In the Varied Items dialog box for the component, type new values forthe items you want to make flexible.

If you do not want to place a component in its flexible state, click Noin the Confirm dialog box and continue with the assembly as normal.

Flexible ItemsYou are not required to type a new value for every item in the Varied Itemsdialog box. You should only type values that are required to define flexibilityfor the instance being placed. A flexible component used several times withinan assembly may have a different flexible definition each time it is used.

Flexible ValuesExcept for features, the flexible value for any item is, by default, definedusing the By value method, in which you type a new value in the New Valuefield of the dialog box.For flexible dimensions, the following five measurement-based methods canbe used to define the flexible value:• Curve Length – Measures a curve length to define the flexible dimensionvalue.

• Distance – Measures a distance between two entities to define the flexibledimension value.

© 2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 5

Page 78: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Angle – Measures an angle to define the flexible dimension value.• Area – Measures a surface area to define the flexible dimension value.• Diameter – Measures the diameter to define the flexible dimension value.Flexible features are not varied using a flexible value. Instead, they have aflexible status that you can edit to either Resumed or Suppressed.

Module 3 | Page 6 © 2012 PTC

Page 79: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Placing Flexible Components in anAssembly

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Component_Operations\Flexible_Placing PLACING_FLEX.ASM

Task 1: Add a flexible part to an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click Assemble , select FLEX_CONTACT.PRT, and click Open.3. Click Yes to confirm using the model’s predefined flexibility.

4. Select the Dimensions tab inthe Varied Items dialog box, ifnecessary.

5. Click in the New Value field forthe ang dimension, and type 90.

6. Select the Features tab andthen click in the New Statusfield. Select Suppressed fromthe drop-down menu.

7. Click Yes from the Warningprompt, and OK to close theVaried Items dialog box.

8. Select the radial surface at the bottom of the connector slot as theassembly's Coincident reference.

9. Select the surface in the connector slot as the assembly's Coincidentreference.

10. Select the top surface of the connector as the assembly's Parallelreference.

11. Click Complete Component .

© 2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 7

Page 80: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Pattern the contact placement and verify the correct placement.

1. In the model tree, right-clickFLEX_CONTACT.PRT andselect Pattern....

2. Click Complete Feature tocreate the Reference pattern.

3. Click View Manager from InGraphics toolbar.

4. Select the Sections tab anddouble-click A.

5. Verify the correct placement ofFLEX_CONTACT.PRT.

6. In the view manager, click Close.

Task 3: Edit the free state contact part and update the connector assembly.

1. In the model tree, expand the pattern, right-click anyFLEX_CONTACT.PRT and select Open.

2. In the model tree, right-clickExtrude 1 and select Edit.

3. Edit the 4 dimension to 8 andpress ENTER.

4. Click Close from the QuickAccess toolbar to return to theassembly.

5. Right-click PLACING_FLEX.ASM in the model tree, andselect Regenerate to update theassembly.

This completes the procedure.

Module 3 | Page 8 © 2012 PTC

Page 81: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Adding Flexibility to Already Placed ComponentsYou can add flexibility to any component already in an assembly.

• Make Flexible• Edit Flexibility

Figure 1 – Add Flexibility toan Assembly

Figure 2 – Add Varied Items

Adding Flexibility to an Already Placed ComponentMany designs contain flexible components such as springs, clips, rubberwashers, and so on. All of these components typically vary geometricallyin their assembled condition. For example, you can position a spring withvarious compression lengths in different locations throughout an assembly.

Creo Parametric enables you to select any component in an assembly andmake it flexible. The component does not have to contain predefined flexibleitems.

Adding Flexible ItemsTo make a component of an assembly flexible, select the component,right-click it, and select Make Flexible. This will open the File Name: PrepareVaried Items dialog box.

With the dialog box open, you can select flexible items and type values thatare used by the flexible component.

Editing Flexibility of an Already Placed ComponentTo edit the flexibility of an already placed component, select the component,right-click it, and select Edit Definition. From the Component Placementdashboard, select the Flexibility tab. Then select the Varied Items button.

Best PracticesPredefined flexibility that you add to a component is saved with thatcomponent model, and can be used anytime that component is placed.

© 2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 9

Page 82: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Flexibility that is added to an already-placed component is not saved with thecomponent. The flexibility is only saved within the assembly model.

To save time, you should add and save flexible items in components that areregularly assembled in a flexible state. This way you are not required tore-select the items each time the component is placed.

Module 3 | Page 10 © 2012 PTC

Page 83: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Adding Flexibility to Already PlacedComponents

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Component_Operations\Flexible_Placed FLEX_PLACED.ASM

Task 1: Add flexibility to a component in the assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar.

3. Select the Sections tab in theView Manager dialog box anddouble-click A. Then click Close.

4. Notice the interferences betweenthe models.

5. From the model tree, right-clickNOZZLE_HOUSE_B.PRT andselect Make Flexible.

6. In the NOZZLE_HOUSE_B :Varied Items dialog box, selectthe Dimensions tab.• In the graphics window, selectfeature Hole 1.

• Select the dimension 12.• Select Add to add it to thelist of variable dimensions.

• Type 14 as the value in theNew Value cell.

• Click OK.

© 2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 11

Page 84: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

7. Click Complete Component .

8. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar.

9. Double-click section A, then clickClose.

The interference hasbeen eliminated fromNOZZLE_HOUSE_B.PRTbut remains inNOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT.

Task 2: Add flexibility to a second component in the assembly.

1. From the model tree, right-clickNOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT andselect Make Flexible.

2. In the Varied Items dialog box,select the Dimensions tab, ifnecessary.• In the graphics window,select feature Extrude 3.This is the inner cut in theNOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRTmodel, highlighted in yellow.

• Select the dimension 8.• Click Add to add it to thelist of variable dimensions.

• Type 9 as the value in the NewValue cell.

• Click OK.

3. Click Complete Component .

4. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar.

5. Double-click section A, then clickClose.

The interferencehas increased. Thedimension was flexedin the wrong direction.

Module 3 | Page 12 © 2012 PTC

Page 85: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 3: Edit the flexibility of a component in the assembly.

1. In the model tree, right-clickNOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT andselect Edit Definition.

2. From the Component Placementdashboard, select the Flexibilitytab.

3. On the Flexibility tab, click theVaried Items button.

4. In the Varied Items dialog box,edit the New Value to 7.

5. Click OK.6. Click Complete Component .

7. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar.

8. Double-click section A, then clickClose.

The interference has beeneliminated.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 13

Page 86: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Using Flexible ParametersYou can use flexible parameters with relations to createpredefined flexible states of a model.

Flexible Parameter

• CLAMP_POSDimensions

• head_ang_dim• stroke_dimRelations

• IF (CLAMP_POS) == 1

head_ang_dim = 45

stroke_dim = 0

ELSE ...Figure 1 – Flexible Parameter Values

Predefined Flexible StatesYou can use flexible parameters and relations to establish a predefined set offlexible model states. You select and use a set of dimension values definingeach flexible state of the model, based on the flexible parameter value usedduring assembly.

For example, if the value of flexible parameter CLAMP_POS is 1, the strokedistance and head angle dimensions receive one set of values. If the value ofCLAMP_POS is 2, the dimensions receive another set of values.

Parameter Controlled RelationsRelations using a parameter called CLAMP_POS to define two predefinedstates of a flexible model are shown below.

IF (CLAMP_POS) == 1

stroke_dim = 0

head_ang_dim = 45

ELSE

IF (CLAMP_POS) == 2

stroke_dim = 34

head_ang_dim = 0

ENDIF

Module 3 | Page 14 © 2012 PTC

Page 87: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Using Flexible Parameters

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Component_Operations\Flexible_Parameters FLEX_PARAMS.ASM

Task 1: Verify that the parameter and relations control the assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the ribbon, select the Model

tab, if necessary.Click Relations , from theModel Intent group.• Highlight stroke_dim in theset of relations, then clickDisplay Dimension todisplay it in the model.

• Highlight head_ang_dim anddisplay it in the model.

3. Click Local Parameters toexpand the dialog box.

4. Edit the value of CLAMP_POSto 2 and click OK.

5. Click Regenerate from theOperations group.

The parameter change has forced a change in the assemblydimensions.

6. Click Parameters , from the Model Intent group, edit the value ofCLAMP_POS to 0 and click OK.

7. Click Regenerate from the Operations group.

The assembly does not change after this regeneration. Yourrelations do not specify dimension values to use when theCLAMP_POS is edited to 0, thus the assembly has not changed.

© 2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 15

Page 88: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Edit dimensions and the parameter to be flexible.

1. Click File > Prepare > ModelProperties to access the ModelProperties dialog box. In theTools section, click change inthe Flexible row.

2. In the model tree, selectCYL_CLAMP_PIN.PRT.

3. In the graphics area, press CTRL and select both dimension.4. Click OK in the Select dialog box.

5. Select the Parameters tab.6. Select the CLAMP_POS

parameter, then click InsertSelected and Close.

7. Click OK in the Flexibility dialogbox.

8. In the Tools section, click Expand in the Flexible row to verify thattwo flexible dimensions and one flexible parameter have been defined.

9. Click Close in the Model Properties dialog box.

Task 3: Insert the flexible clamp assembly into another assembly.

1. Click Open from the Quick access toolbar, select TOOL.ASM,and click Open.

2. In the ribbon, select the Model tab, if necessary. Click Assemble

from the Component group, select FLEX_PARAMS.ASM, andclick Open.

3. Click Yes to confirm using the model’s predefined flexibility.

4. On the Dimensions tab of the Varied Items dialog box, type 0 in theNew Value field for the stroke_dim.

5. Click OK to close the Varied Items dialog box.6. Place the sub-assembly by clicking the white dot of the receiving

interface in the lower-left corner of the assembly.7. Click Complete Component .

Module 3 | Page 16 © 2012 PTC

Page 89: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

8. In the ribbon, select the Model tab, if necessary. Click Assemble

from the Component group, select FLEX_PARAMS.ASM, andclick Open.

9. Click Yes to confirm using the model's predefined flexibility.10. Select the Parameters tab in the Varied Items dialog box and type a

new value of 1 for the CLAMP_POS parameter. Click OK to close.11. Place the sub-assembly by clicking the white dot of the receiving

interface, in the upper-left corner of the assembly.12. Click Complete Component .

13. Place a third instance ofFLEX_PARAMS.ASM in theupper-right corner of theassembly; this time use a flexibleCLAMP_POS value of 2.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 17

Page 90: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module 3 | Page 18 © 2012 PTC

Page 91: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module4Restructuring and Mirroring Assemblies

Module OverviewThe assembly structure of a design often changes throughout the designprocess. The Restructure tool in Creo Parametric provides a tool forreorganizing the assembly structure of your design.

Mirror functionality in Creo Parametric enables you to create mirrored copiesof parts and assemblies. You can mirror geometry and placement of modelsas dependent or independent copies of the original models.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Restructure and reorder components in an assembly.• Mirror an assembly structure.• Mirror a component inside an assembly.• Mirror a sub-assembly inside an assembly.

© 2012 PTC Module 4 | Page 1

Page 92: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Restructuring and Reordering AssemblyComponentsThe Restructure tool enables you to move components todifferent locations in an assembly structure.

Restructure Diagram Elements

• Source Components• Target AssemblyCan restructure and/or reordermultiple components by using thedrag-and-drop method.

Show Features in model tree. Figure 1 – Restructured Assembly

Figure 2 – RestructuringComponents Figure 3 – Reordering Components

Restructuring and Reordering Assembly ComponentsYou can move components to different locations in an assembly structure.This is called restructuring. You can restructure and/or reorder multiplecomponents by dragging and dropping them in the model tree. You canreorganize components from one sub-assembly to another, and fromthe top-level assembly to a sub-assembly, or vice versa. Prior to CreoParametric, you used the Restructure dialog box, which is still available byclicking Restructure from the Component drop down menu in the ribbon.The drag and drop method of restructuring is easier and less restrictive thanthe Restructure dialog box. When restructuring components using dragand drop, the system also reorders the components to where you drop inthe target sub-assembly. The Restructure dialog box simply places thecomponents at the bottom of the target assembly structure, requiring anadditional reorder step.

In some cases, showing Features in the model tree makes it easierto select the appropriate drop location.

New Sub-AssembliesIt is common for an assembly to be reorganized during a design process.Often, top-level components are restructured into numerous sub-assemblies.

Module 4 | Page 2 © 2012 PTC

Page 93: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

You may create a new, empty sub-assembly and restructure a number ofcomponents into that new sub-assembly or you may use the Move to NewSubassembly shortcut to accomplish this in a single operation. After youselect components to be restructured, you can right-click, and then selectMove to New Subassembly to create a new sub-assembly and automaticallyrestructure the selected components into that sub-assembly. The newsub-assembly is placed at the same level as the selected source components.

Assembly ReferencesThe Restructure tool enables you to move components from a top-levelassembly into a sub-assembly, from one sub-assembly to anothersub-assembly, and from a sub-assembly to a higher level assembly. It islikely that restructuring a component will place the assembly references ofthe moved component outside of the new assembly level.

It is a best practice to always keep assembly references within one levelrather than allowing them to travel through multiple levels of an assembly.For example, avoid assembling a component contained in a sub-assembly toreferences in a higher or lower level assembly. Keep the reference insidethat sub-assembly. This practice makes the reference easier to restructureand work with an assembly.

Edit the definition of restructured components so that you can verifytheir references are inside the new sub-assembly and not externalto it. If the component uses references external to the currentassembly level, the Remove External References dialog boxappears and enables you to remove any external references.

Restructuring LimitationsThe Restructure tool contains several limitations. Some of the limitationsare not related to the tool, but rather to the logical function of assemblyreferences.

• You cannot restructure components that are part of a pattern.• If an assembly contains multiple copies of the same sub-assembly,restructuring components from that sub-assembly reduces the total numberof the restructured component found in the assembly to be only one. Allother instances of the component are simply removed from the assembly.

• You cannot restructure a parent component to come after any childcomponents.

• If you restructure components with children into a sub-assembly, you arenot able to restructure the same component out of the sub-assembly unlessyou first restructure those children into the same sub-assembly.

© 2012 PTC Module 4 | Page 3

Page 94: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Restructuring and Reordering AssemblyComponents

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Component_Operations\Restructure_Reorder VALVE.ASM

Task 1: Restructure components into a sub-assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, expand

COVER.ASM and ARM.ASM.3. Press CTRL and select both

HANDLE.PRT and RING.PRTfrom the model tree.

4. Drag HANDLE.PRT andRING.PRT and drop them justbelow ARM.PRT.

Task 2: Simultaneously Restructure and Reorder components out of asub-assembly.

1. In the model tree, select thefirst BOLT_HEX.PRT, pressCTRL, then select remaining twoBOLT_HEX.PRT models.

2. Drag the three selectedcomponents to just beforePLATE.PRT.• Move the cursor to the left untilVALVE.ASM highlights insteadof ARM.ASM to ensure thecorrect location is selected.

Module 4 | Page 4 © 2012 PTC

Page 95: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 3: Restructure components into a new sub-assembly.

1. In the model tree, selectPLATE.PRT, press CTRL,then select both SCREW.PRTmodels.

2. Right-click and select Move toNew Subassembly.

3. In the Component Create dialogbox, type plate in the Name fieldand click OK.

4. Click Browse in the CreationOptions dialog box.

5. In the Open dialogbox, double-clickMM_KG_SEC_ASSY.ASM.

6. Click OK in the Creation Optionsdialog box.

7. Right-click and select DefaultConstraint.

8. In the dashboard, clickCompleteComponent .

9. In the model tree, expandPLATE.ASM.

Task 4: Remove external references from the new sub-assembly.

1. In the model tree, right-click PLATE.ASM and select Open.2. In the model tree, right-click PLATE.PRT and select Edit Definition.

The Remove External References dialog box opens becausePLATE.PRT was originally assembled to the VALVE.ASM andstill has references to it.

3. Click OK from the Remove External References dialog box. CreoParametric automatically removes any external reference and enablesyou to create new assembly constraints within PLATE.ASM.

4. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab, right-click Set15 (UserDefined), and select Delete.

5. Right-click in the graphics window and select Default Constraint.6. In the dashboard, click Complete Component .

© 2012 PTC Module 4 | Page 5

Page 96: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

7. Click Close .8. Edit the definition of PLATE.ASM.9. In the dashboard, select the

Placement tab, right-click Set30(User Defined), and selectDelete.

10. Select the center of the3D Dragger and drag thesub-assembly out of the top-levelassembly.

11. Add Coincident constraintsreferencing the front face andtwo holes of SHAFT.PRT.• Note that the second hole’scoincident constraint willautomatically change toOriented.

12. In the dashboard, clickCompleteComponent .

Task 5: Reorder components within an assembly.

1. Collapse the model tree.2. Reorder the plate assembly

by dragging it before the coverassembly.

This completes the procedure.

Module 4 | Page 6 © 2012 PTC

Page 97: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Mirrored AssembliesYou can create a mirrored copy of an assembly directly withinCreo Parametric.

Mirror Assembly Actions

• Mirror Geometry• Reuse• ExcludeDependency

Mirrored Merge FeatureFigure 1 – Mirrored Assembly Model

Tree

Figure 2 – Original Assembly Figure 3 – Mirrored Assembly

Creating Mirrored AssembliesYou can create a mirrored copy of an assembly directly within CreoParametric. Click File > Save As > Save a Mirror Assembly to open the MirrorAssembly dialog box.• Determine if mirrored assembly geometry should be dependantor independent from the source assembly. If you mirror geometryindependently, without selecting the Geometry dependent check box, itdoes not update when the source model changes.

• Type a name for the new, mirrored assembly file.• Preview the mirrored assembly.

Figure 4 – Mirror Assembly Dialog Box

Mirrored Assembly ActionsAfter defining the mirrored assembly name and geometry dependency, assignmirror action for each component of the assembly from within the MirrorAssembly Components dialog box. You can define the following actionsfor each component:

© 2012 PTC Module 4 | Page 7

Page 98: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Mirror Geometry – The default option for every component in the originalassembly is Mirror Geometry. A mirrored copy of the assembly and everycomponent in the source assembly will be created.You can assign new names to components mirrored with geometry or youcan accept the default “_MIR” suffix added to each file name.

• Reuse – This option reuses the selected component and only mirrors itsplacement. New models are not created for these components. This isuseful for symmetrical models that you can use in both the original andmirrored location.

• Exclude – Use this option to exclude any component from the mirroredassembly.

Dependency QuestionsWhat happens to the mirrored assembly if the original source assembly isdeleted?• You can open and reference the mirrored assembly, however, all mirroredgeometry is frozen. You can add features but you cannot edit the MirroredMerge feature.

What happens to a component of a mirrored assembly if the original sourcecomponent is deleted?• You can open and reference the mirrored component, however, all mirroredgeometry is frozen, as if the model were created without dependency.

Best PracticesOnly use Mirror Assembly when creating assemblies that are truly mirrorsof the original model. The functionality is not intended for creating mirroredassemblies that you later turn into independent assemblies, with littleresemblance to the original.

Module 4 | Page 8 © 2012 PTC

Page 99: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Assemblies

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Component_Operations\Mirror_Assembly MIRROR_ASSY.ASM

Task 1: Create a mirrored copy of MIRROR_ASSY.ASM.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters....3. Under Display, select the Features, Placement folder, and

Annotations check boxes.4. Click OK.5. Click File > Save As > Save a Mirror Assembly.6. Type mirror_assy_mir in the New Name field of the Mirror Assembly

dialog box.This is the name of the new mirrored assembly.

7. Select the Preview checkbox and spin the modelto observe the preview ofMIRROR_ASSY_MIR.ASM.

8. Click OK from the MirrorAssembly dialog box.

9. In the Mirror Assembly Components dialog box, select the Previewcheck box to preview the mirrored assembly, as it is configured:

• Leave STOPPER_COVER.PRT, STOPPER.ASM, andSTOPPER_BASE.PRT with the Mirror Geometry option.Accept the default new name suffix “_MIR” for the mirrored copies.

• Select Reuse from the Action drop-down list forSTOPPER_PLUG.PRT.You only need to mirror the location of these symmetricalcomponents in the new assembly.

• Select Exclude from the Action drop-down list forSTOPPER_SCREW.PRT.

© 2012 PTC Module 4 | Page 9

Page 100: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

10. Click OK to close the dialog box and create the new assembly.

Task 2: Observe the new mirrored assembly and make edits to the original.

1. In the model tree, expand thenode of each component. Noticethe following:• Each component mirrored withgeometry contains a MirroredMerge feature.

• The stopper plug does notcontain a Mirrored Mergefeature because only itsplacement is mirrored.

• The screw components areremoved.

2. Click Windows > MIRROR_ASSY.ASM from the Quick Accesstoolbar to activate it.

3. In the model tree, right-click STOPPER_COVER.PRT,and selectActivate.

4. Expand STOPPER_COVER.PRT, right-click Extrude 1, and selectEdit.

5. Edit dimension 50 to 70 and dimension 30 to 50.

6. Click Regenerate .

7. Click Windows >MIRROR_ASSY_MIR.ASMfrom the Quick Access toolbar toactivate it.

8. Click Regenerate to updatethe mirrored cover component.

Module 4 | Page 10 © 2012 PTC

Page 101: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

You can edit the definition of the Mirrored Merge feature tochange dependency between the original and mirrored geometry.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 4 | Page 11

Page 102: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Mirrored ComponentsYou can create a mirrored part from inside an assembly.

Figure 1 – Assembly

Mirror Part Options

• Mirror geometry only• Mirror geometry with features• Mirror placementDependency Control

• Geometry dependent• Placement dependent

Figure 2 – Assembly with MirroredPart

Creating Mirrored ComponentsYou can create a mirrored copy of a part from within an assembly by clicking

Create from the Component group in the ribbon. This opens theComponent Create dialog box, in which you:• Select Part as the type of model to create.• Select Mirror as the model subtype to create.• Type a name for the new mirrored part.

Mirror Part OptionsWhen creating a mirrored copy of a part, the Mirror part dialog box enablesyou to define the mirrored copy.Mirror Type:• Mirror geometry only – You create a mirrored copy by using the MirroredMerge feature. No feature structure is included in this mirror type, only thesingle merge feature.

• Mirror geometry with features – You create a mirrored copy that includesfeature structure using this option. You include all features of the originalpart in this mirrored copy, then as a last feature, you apply the MirroredMerge feature.Having feature structure in the mirrored part enables you to edit thestructure, independent of the original model.

• Mirror placement – Does not create a new mirrored part. You use it tomirror the placement of an assembled part.

It is often easier to simply reassemble a component into a mirroredposition rather than use Mirror Placement.

Module 4 | Page 12 © 2012 PTC

Page 103: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Dependency Control:

• Geometry dependent – Only available when you use Mirror Geometry.This option defines the mirrored geometry as dependent or independentof the original model.

• Placement dependent – Makes placement of the mirrored part dependentor independent of the original model's placement.

Dependency QuestionsWhat happens to the mirrored part if the original source part is deleted?• You can open and reference the mirrored part, however, all mirroredgeometry is frozen. You can add features but you cannot edit the MirroredMerge feature.

Best PracticesOnly use Mirror part when you create parts that are truly mirrors of the originalmodel. The functionality is not intended for creating mirrored parts that youlater turn into independent parts, with little resemblance to the original.

© 2012 PTC Module 4 | Page 13

Page 104: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Components

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Component_Operations\Mirror_Component MIRROR_COMP.ASM

Task 1: Create a mirrored copy of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, click Settings

> Tree Filters....3. Under Display, select the

Features check box and clickOK.

4. In the ribbon, click Createfrom the Component group.

5. In the Component Create dialogbox:• Click Part and Mirror.• Type base_left-1 in the Namefield.

• Click OK.

6. In the Mirror Part dialog box:

• Select the Preview checkbox.

• Ensure that Mirror geometryonly is selected.

• Ensure that the Geometrydependent check box isselected.

• Ensure that the Placementdependent check box iscleared.

• Select BASE_RIGHT.PRT asthe Part Reference.

• Select ASM_RIGHT as thePlanar Reference.

• Click OK.

7. In the model tree, expand the BASE_LEFT-1.PRT node.

Because Mirror Geometry Only was used, the part's featurestructure is a single Mirrored Merge feature.

Module 4 | Page 14 © 2012 PTC

Page 105: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Edit the geometry of BASE_RIGHT.PRT and observe the results.

1. In the model tree, right-click BASE_RIGHT.PRT and select Activate.2. Edit the radius dimension in Round 2 from 1 to .25.

3. Click Regenerate .4. In the model tree, right-click MIRROR_COMP.ASM and select

Activate.

5. Click Regenerate .

Because Geometry Dependent was used, the correspondinground geometry in BASE_LEFT-1.PRT also updates.

Task 3: Edit the placement of BASE_RIGHT.PRT and observe the results.

1. In the model tree, right-clickBASE_RIGHT.PRT and selectEdit.

2. Edit the assembly offsetdimension value from 0 to 5.

3. Click Regenerate .

Because Placement Dependent was not used, the placement ofBASE_LEFT-1.PRT is independent of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.

4. In the model tree, right-click BASE_LEFT-1.PRT, select Suppress,and then click OK.

Task 4: Create another mirrored copy of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.

1. In the ribbon, click Create from the Component group.2. In the Component Create dialog box:

• Type base_left-2 in the Name field.• Click OK.

© 2012 PTC Module 4 | Page 15

Page 106: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

3. In the Mirror Part dialog box:

• Select the Preview checkbox.

• Under Mirror Type, selectMirror geometry withfeatures.

• Select the Placementdependent check box.

• Select BASE_RIGHT.PRT asthe Part Reference.

• Select ASM_RIGHT as thePlanar Reference.

• Click OK.

Task 5: Edit the geometry and placement of both models. Observe theresults.

1. In the model tree, expand the BASE_LEFT-2.PRT node.2. Select Chamfer 3, right-click, select Delete, and click OK.3. Expand the BASE_RIGHT.PRT node. Notice that Chafer 3 remains in

this model.

4. In the model tree, right-clickBASE_RIGHT.PRT and selectActivate.

5. Edit the radius dimension inRound 2 from .25 to 1.

6. Click Regenerate .

7. In the model tree, right-click MIRROR_COMP.ASM and selectActivate.

8. Click Regenerate .

Because Include all Feature data was used, this mirrored partcontains a full feature structure, each independent of the originalsource model.

Module 4 | Page 16 © 2012 PTC

Page 107: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

9. Select BASE_RIGHT.PRT, right-click, and select Edit.10. Edit the assembly offset dimension value from 5 to 0.

11. Click Regenerate .

Because Placement Dependent was used, the placement ofBASE_LEFT-2.PRT changes with that of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 4 | Page 17

Page 108: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Mirrored Sub-AssembliesYou can create a mirrored sub-assembly from inside anassembly.

Dependency Control

• Geometry dependent• Placement dependent

Figure 1 – Assembly Figure 2 – With MirroredSub-Assembly

Creating Mirrored Sub-AssembliesYou can create a mirrored copy of a sub-assembly from within an assembly

by clicking Create from the Component group in the ribbon. This opensthe Component Create dialog box, in which you:• Select Subassembly as the type of model to create.• Select Mirror as the model subtype to create.• Type a name for the new mirrored part.

Mirror Sub-Assembly OptionsWhen creating a mirrored copy of a sub-assembly from within an assembly,you create all mirrored components as geometry-only models. The Include allFeature data option is not available when mirroring a sub-assembly.

You can configure Dependency Control as follows:

• Geometry dependent – Defines the mirrored geometry of each componentas dependent or independent of the original models.

• Placement dependent – Makes placement of the mirrored componentsdependent or independent of the original model's placement.

Dependency QuestionsWhat happens to the mirrored sub-assembly if the original sourcesub-assembly is deleted?

Module 4 | Page 18 © 2012 PTC

Page 109: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• You can open or reference the mirrored assembly. All mirrored geometryis frozen and cannot be edited. Component placement is also frozen;however, you can edit the placement definition for each component.

Best PracticesOnly use Mirror Subassembly when you create sub-assemblies that aretrue mirrors of the original sub-assembly. The functionality is not intendedfor creating mirrored sub-assemblies that you later turn into independentsub-assemblies, with little resemblance to the original.

© 2012 PTC Module 4 | Page 19

Page 110: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Sub-Assemblies

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Component_Operations\Mirror_SubassemblyMIRROR_SUB.ASM

Task 1: Create a mirrored copy of STOPPER_BACK.ASM.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, click Settings

> Tree Filters....3. Under Display, select the

Features check box and clickOK.

4. In the ribbon, click Createfrom the Component group.

5. In the Component Create dialogbox:• Click Subassembly andMirror.

• Type stopper_front in theName field.

• Click OK.

6. In the Mirror Subassembly dialogbox:• Ensure that both Geometrydependent and Placementdependent are selected.

• Select STOPPER_BACK.ASMas the Assembly Reference.

• Select ASM_TOP as thePlanar Reference.

• Select the Preview checkbox.

• Click OK.

Module 4 | Page 20 © 2012 PTC

Page 111: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

7. In the Mirror Subassembly Components dialog box, select thePreview check box to preview the mirrored assembly as it isconfigured:• Ensure STOPPER_BASE.PRT is set to Mirror Geometry.A mirrored copy of this model is required in a mirrored assembly.Accept the default new name suffix “_MIR” for the mirrored copies.

• Select Reuse from the Action drop-down list forSTOPPER_PLUG.PRT and STOPPER_SCREW.PRT.Only the locations of these symmetrical components need to bemirrored in the new assembly.

• Click OK to close the dialog box and create the new assembly.

8. In the model tree, expand the STOPPER_FRONT.ASM andSTOPPER_BASE_MIR.PRT nodes. Notice the two Mirrored Mergefeatures.

Task 2: Edit geometry of STOPPER_BASE.PRT and observe the results.

1. In the model tree, expandSTOPPER_BACK.ASM.

2. Expand STOPPER_BASE.PRT,right-click Round 2, and selectEdit.

3. Edit the radius dimension from1 to .25.

4. Click Regenerate .

Because Geometry Dependent was used, the correspondinground geometry in STOPPER_BASE_MIR.PRT also updates.

© 2012 PTC Module 4 | Page 21

Page 112: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 3: Edit the placement of STOPPER_BACK.ASM and observe theresults.

1. In the model tree, right-clickSTOPPER_BACK.ASM andselect Edit.

2. Edit the assembly offsetdimension value from 0 to 5.

3. Click Regenerate .

Because Placement Dependent was used, the placementof STOPPER_FRONT.ASM changes with that ofSTOPPER_BACK.ASM.

This completes the procedure.

Module 4 | Page 22 © 2012 PTC

Page 113: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module5Using Assembly Features and Shrinkwrap

Module OverviewIn an assembly, you can create assembly datum features such as planes,axes, points, curves, and coordinate systems. You can also create assemblyfeatures that remove material such as holes, extrudes, and sweeps. In thismodule, you focus on creating assembly features to remove material fromcomponents of the assembly.

Also, in this module you learn about creating and using shrinkwrap featuresand shrinkwrap models as a way to automatically create lightweight copies ofcomplex parts and assemblies.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Understand assembly features.• Understand assembly intersections.• Create assembly cuts.• Create assembly holes.• Create shrinkwrap features.• Create shrinkwrap models.

© 2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 1

Page 114: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Understanding Assembly FeaturesYou can use assembly features to remove material from parts inan assembly without altering the standalone part.

Assembly Features:

• Remove Material• Intersected Components– Selected Models– Display Level

Figure 1 – Assembly Level CutFigure 2 – Assembly Level Hole

Understanding Assembly FeaturesCreating features in an assembly is very similar to creating features in apart, except there are some restrictions and some additional options. In anassembly, you can create assembly datum features such as planes, axes,points, curves, and coordinate systems. You can also create assemblyfeatures that remove material such as holes, extrudes, and sweeps. Youcannot create an assembly feature that adds material, only features thatremove material.

There are two main reasons for using assembly features:

• Design Intent – If the product you have designed has material removedfrom it after the components have been assembled, then you should dothe same in Creo Parametric. One example of this assembly type is aweldment; parts are positioned, welded together, and then holes or othermaterial removal operations are performed on the assembly.

• Interfering Components – In some cases, the assembly of a componentsuch as a force-fit clip or self-tapping hole may remove material, but in

Module 5 | Page 2 © 2012 PTC

Page 115: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creo Parametric, there is an interference between the components. Youcan use an assembly feature as a tool to eliminate that interference.

Depending on your situation, Creo Parametric’s flexible componentfunctionality may be a better option for handling interferingcomponents.

Intersected ComponentsBy default, assembly features remove material from every componentintersected by the feature and are displayed only in the assembly level ofthe model. The components intersected by the feature can be manuallycontrolled using Advanced Intersection options within the Intersect tab. Thedisplay level of the feature can be assigned to the Part Level, Top Level, or toa specific part or assembly.

PerformanceBe aware that any assembly feature that has its default edited to the TopLevel display level can cause performance issues when working with largeassemblies. In order for Creo Parametric to have a feature with only thetop-level assembly displayed, a duplicate instance is created of everyintersected part and one of the assembly features is disabled.

Because of this, there are two instances of every intersected part in memory,increasing the memory used by the assembly.

If the display level is edited to Part Level, twin instances are not created andperformance is not affected.

Best PracticesOnly use assembly features when they are demanded by the real worldassembly process.

© 2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 3

Page 116: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Understanding Assembly Feature IntersectionsYou can control which components an assembly featureintersects and the level at which the feature is displayed.

Intersection Options:

• Automatic Update• Advanced Intersection• Intersected Models• Display Level– Top Level– Part Level– Sel Level

Figure 1 – Intersect Tab

Understanding Assembly Feature IntersectionsWhen you create a hole or cut in an assembly, you are able to select theparts from which to remove material as well as the level at which the materialremoval is displayed. The feature can be displayed in the top-level assembly,sub-assembly, or part level.

Assembly Feature Intersection ConfigurationWhen you create an assembly level cut or hole, the feature is displayed inall intersected components at the assembly level in which the feature wascreated. You can further configure the intersected components and displaylevels using the Intersect tab or the Intersected Comps dialog box. TheIntersect tab can be opened from the feature dashboard. You can open theIntersected Comps dialog box by right-clicking the assembly feature andselecting Intersect from the shortcut menu.

Automatic UpdateWhen you create an assembly feature such as a cut or hole, the AutomaticUpdate option is enabled by default. Automatic Update ensures the following:

• All components added to the assembly before the assembly feature areautomatically added to the list of intersected components.

• The display level of the assembly feature is set to Top Level for allintersected components and cannot be edited to Part Level.

• Components cannot be manually removed from the list of intersectedcomponents.

Module 5 | Page 4 © 2012 PTC

Page 117: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

You can right-click any component in the Intersected Models list and selectInformation to obtain information about the assembly feature. AutomaticUpdate is enabled by default.When Automatic Update is disabled, you can right-click a component andselect Remove to manually remove the component from the list of modelsintersected by the feature. You can right-click and select IntersectingComponents Collector to manually add a model to the list of intersectedmodels.

Components assembled after the intersecting feature is created arenot intersected unless they are also reordered before the feature.

Advanced IntersectionWhen Automatic Update is disabled, you can toggle Advanced Intersection toswitch between basic and advanced intersection modes. In the IntersectedModels area, you see each intersected model along with its defined displaylevel.When Advanced Intersection is disabled, the only options available in theshortcut menu when you right-click a component in the list are Remove andInformation.After you enable Advanced Intersection, the following additional options areavailable in the shortcut menu when you right-click a component:• Add Instance – Adds a family table instance of the selected component inthe Intersected Models list to the family table instances list. This option isonly available when the display level of the selected component is setto Top Level.

• Part Level – Makes the new feature visible wherever this version of the partis used, even outside the current assembly.

In addition, you can define the display level by selecting the top-levelassembly or a component's file name from the drop-down list. Activate thedrop-down list by selecting a component in the Intersected Models list andselecting a file name from the drop-down list in the display column.

You can edit Advanced Intersection mode back to Basic mode onlywhen all intersected components have the same display level andno family table instances are intersected by the feature.

SettingsThe settings area enables you to define default settings for the intersectedcomponents. Settings include the following:• Default Display Level – Use this drop-down list to set the display level tobe applied to components as they are added to the Intersected Modelslist. Available options are Part Level, Top Level, and Sel Level. If youselect the Sel Level option, you are prompted to select the file name of thecomponent where you want the feature displayed.

• Add Instances – Adds a family table instance when inserting an assemblyfeature in the model.

• Check Geometry Option – Enables you to create a more stable featurewhen problem geometry is involved. This option is useful when assembly

© 2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 5

Page 118: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

components have differing levels of accuracy when being combined. Whenthe Check Geometry Option check box is used, it applies to the entirefeature and not individual intersected components.

• Show Feature Properties In Sub-Models – Sets the default display of theassembly feature as a property of the individual components in the modeltree. This option is only available when the Default Display Level is set toPart Level.

Module 5 | Page 6 © 2012 PTC

Page 119: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating an Assembly CutYou can use assembly cuts to remove material from one or morecomponents at the assembly level.

Assembly Cuts:

• Sketch• Direction• Intersected Models• Display Level

Figure 1 – Three Part AssemblyBefore Cut

Figure 2 – Three Part AssemblyAfter Cut

Creating an Assembly CutYou cannot use assembly features to add material to an assembly; however,you can use features such as extrudes and sweeps to remove material fromcomponents of an assembly at the assembly level.

You can use assembly cuts to remove material from components at theassembly level. Common conditions for material removal at the assemblylevel are as follows:

• Material removed due to assembly procedures such as press or force fitof components.

• Tooling assemblies in which components are assembled and machiningoperations are used to remove material from the assembled components.

• To maintain tolerances in weldment assemblies, material is often removedafter the components have been welded together.

Sketch, Depth, and DirectionLike similar part cuts, an assembly cut has a sketch that defines its shape.It also has a defined depth and direction. A sweep feature has trajectoriesthat define its depth and direction.

© 2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 7

Page 120: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Intersected ModelsBy default, assembly cuts remove material from every component inan assembly that is intersected by the feature. You can add or removecomponents from the Intersected Models list in the Intersect tab or IntersectedComps dialog box.

Display LevelIn the Intersected Models list, you can also configure the display level of eachintersected part. By default, the display level is set to Top Level. The displaylevel can be set to Part Level, Top Level, or to a specific part or assembly.

Module 5 | Page 8 © 2012 PTC

Page 121: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating an Assembly Cut

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Assembly_Features\Cut HATCH.ASM

Task 1: Use a revolved feature to remove material from the assembly.

In the model tree, clickSettings > TreeFilters. In the Model TreeItems dialog box, select theFeatures check box andclick OK.

1. Enable only the following DatumDisplay types: .

2. Click Revolve from the Cut& Surface group.

3. In the model tree, selectASM_FRONT as the sketchplane.

4. Click Sketch View from theSetup group.

5. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden Line from the ModelDisplay types drop-down menu.

6. Sketch a Datum Centerline and a section, as shown in the figure.

© 2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 9

Page 122: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

7. After completing the sketch, clickOK .

8. Select Shading from theModel Display types drop-downmenu.

9. Click Complete Feature fromthe Revolve dashboard.

Task 2: Verify the display level of the assembly feature.

1. From the In Graphics toolbar,

select the Named Viewsdrop-down menu and selectStandard Orientation.

In the assembly, therevolve feature wasapplied to the threeHATCH-RING.PRTmodels.

2. In the model tree, select one ofthe HATCH-RING.PRT models,right-click, and select Open.

As expected, therevolve feature is notdisplayed at the partlevel.

3. Click Close from the QuickAccess toolbar.

Module 5 | Page 10 © 2012 PTC

Page 123: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 3: Remove a component from the Intersected Components list.

1. In the model tree, right-clickRevolve 1 and select Intersect.

2. In the Intersected Comps dialogbox, do the following:• Clear the Automatic Updatecheck box.

• Right-click the lastHATCH-RING model inthe list and select Remove.

• Click OK.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 11

Page 124: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Assembly HolesYou can use assembly holes when holes intersect componentsat the assembly level.

Assembly Holes:

• Intersected Models• Display Level

Figure 1 – Before Assembly Hole Figure 2 – After Assembly Hole

Creating Assembly HolesYou can use assembly holes to add holes at the assembly level that intersectone or more components of the assembly. Typically, you use assembly holesduring the assembly process when you must maintain an assembly toleranceor to maintain the position of components prior to adding the hole.

Intersected ModelsBy default, assembly holes remove material from every component inan assembly that is intersected by the feature. You can add or removecomponents from the Intersected Models list in the Intersect tab or in theIntersected Comps dialog box.

Display LevelIn the Intersected Models list, you can also configure the display level of eachintersected part. By default, the display level is set to Top Level. The displaylevel can be set to Part Level, Top Level, or to a specific part or assembly.

Module 5 | Page 12 © 2012 PTC

Page 125: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Assembly Holes

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Assembly_Features\Hole ASSY_HOLE.ASM

Task 1: Begin creating an assembly hole.

1. Enable only the following DatumDisplay types: .

2. In the model tree, click Settings

> Tree Filters. In theModel Tree Items dialog box,select the Suppressed Objectscheck box.• Click OK.

3. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar. In theView Manager dialog box, selectthe All tab.

4. Double-click the Comb0001state to activate the combinationview.

The self-tapping screw enters through a hole in the outer part, thentaps into the inner part. This causes an interference condition inthe Creo Parametric assembly.

5. Double-click the Default Allstate and click Close in the ViewManager dialog box.

6. In the model tree, right-clickSCREW_SELF-TAP.PRT andselect Suppress. Click OK toconfirm.

© 2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 13

Page 126: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

7. In the ribbon, click Hole fromthe Cut & Surface group.

8. Select datum axis A_2 tohighlight it. Press CTRL andselect the surface shown in thefigure.

9. Select the Through Alldepth option.

10. Edit the diameter to 9.

If the feature was completed as is, the hole would intersect both theinner and outer parts. However, this would not match our designintent.

Task 2: Determine which model the assembly hole will intersect.

1. Select the Intersect tab from thedashboard.

2. Clear the Automatic Updatecheck box.

3. Select the AdvancedIntersection check box.

4. Right-click OUTER from theIntersected Models list andselect Remove.

5. Click Complete Feature .

Because the screw is suppressed, it is automatically removed fromthe Intersected Models list. You can return a part to the list usingthe Add Intersected Models button.

6. In the model tree, right-clickSCREW_SELF-TAP.PRT andselect Resume.

7. Click View Manager . In theView Manager dialog box, selectthe All tab.

8. Double-click the Comb0001state to activate the combinationview.

The assembly hole now intersects the inner part.

Module 5 | Page 14 © 2012 PTC

Page 127: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

9. In the model tree, selectINNER.PRT, right-click, andselect Open.

As expected, the hole does not appear at the part level.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 15

Page 128: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating a Shrinkwrap FeatureThe shrinkwrap feature automatically selects and copies surfacedata from a part or assembly into a feature.

Shrinkwrap Feature:

• References• Options• Subset• Surface subset collection methods– Outer Shell– Auto collect all solid surfaces– Manual collection Figure 1 –Detailed AssemblyModel

Figure 2 – Auto Collect AllSolid Surfaces Figure 3 – Outer Shell

Creating a Shrinkwrap FeatureShrinkwrap features contain a collection of associatively copied surfaces anddatums that represent the exterior shape of a referenced part or assembly.

Based on a specified collection method, the shrinkwrap feature automaticallycollects surfaces from the source assembly and copies them associativelyinto the shrinkwrap feature. Because the surfaces are copied associatively,the shrinkwrap feature updates when edits are made to the assembly.

Using the References and Options tab, you can refine the automatic collectionof surfaces to be included in the shrinkwrap feature.

Uses of a Shrinkwrap FeatureThere are three main uses for a shrinkwrap feature, which are as follows:

• To create a lightweight version of a complex part or assembly that youcan use as a reference or packaging model. You can also turn a modelcontaining a shrinkwrap feature in to an envelope model and substituteit in a simplified rep.

• To create an associative model that you can use to share geometry withvendors or customers while eliminating any proprietary detail you do notwant to share.

Module 5 | Page 16 © 2012 PTC

Page 129: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• To create a lightweight simplified rep by creating a shrinkwrap feature inan assembly and then excluding everything in the assembly except theshrinkwrap feature.

SubsetYou can click Subset in the Shrinkwrap dashboard to open the ShrinkwrapComps dialog box. In this dialog box, you can select components to beconsidered or ignored during the shrinkwrap creation process.

Surface Subset Collection MethodsIn the Shrinkwrap dashboard, you can select from three surface subsetcollection methods to be used in creation of the shrinkwrap feature. Thethree methods are as follows:• Outer Shell – Collect surfaces that represent the outer shell of theassembly.

• Autocollect all solid surfaces – Collect all solid surfaces in the assembly.The results of this surface collection method can be converted to a solidshrinkwrap feature.

• Manual collection – You can manually select any surfaces you wantincluded in the shrinkwrap feature.

ReferencesIn the Shrinkwrap dashboard, you can open the References tab to specifygeometry to always be included or excluded from the shrinkwrap feature.You can select from the following:• Always include surfaces – Select any geometry in the source model thatshould always be included in the shrinkwrap feature.

• Never include surfaces – Select any geometry in the source model thatshould never be included in the shrinkwrap feature.

• Chain – Select curves and surface geometry adjacent to selected solidedges.

• Include Datums – Select any datum features that should be includedin the shrinkwrap feature.

OptionsIn the Shrinkwrap dashboard, you can open the Options tab where you cancontrol the automatic selection of geometry in the source model. The followingoptions are only available when using the Outer Shell collection method:• Subset Options – Subset options configure one of two creation options:– Shrinkwrap then Exclude– Shrinkwrap the entire source model then

exclude geometry from models that you have selected to never include.– Exclude then Shrinkwrap– Exclude models that you have selected to

never include, then shrinkwrap the model.

• Quality Level – You can edit the relative quality of the shrinkwrap featurecreation process to a value between 1 and 10. High quality levels increaseprocessing time, file size, and the level of detail included in the shrinkwrapfeature.

© 2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 17

Page 130: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Attributes – You can select attributes that control the automatic selectionof shrinkwrap geometry. Attributes include the following:– Auto Hole Filling– Fill all holes or cuts that intersect a single surface.– Include Quilts– Select quilts that should always be included in the

shrinkwrap feature.– Ignore Small Surfaces– Exclude surfaces that are smaller than a

specified percentage of the model's overall size.

• Dependent – By default, the shrinkwrap feature is a dependent ofthe source components. If you edit the size or position of the originalcomponent, the shrinkwrap feature updates accordingly.

When using the Auto collect all solid surfaces collection method, you canselect the Solidify resulting geometry check box in order to create solidgeometry from the collected surfaces.

The Fill contours option enables you to explicitly select surface geometrywhere you want any intersecting hole or cavity to be filled or excluded fromthe shrinkwrap feature. You can use this option when using any of the threecollection methods. A black curve is placed in the shrinkwrap feature torepresent contours that have been removed.

By default, all inner contours of a selected contour surface are filled. Byclearing the check box next to a selected contour surface, you can manuallyremove geometry from the fill operation. For example, if you select a fillcontour surface that includes five holes to fill, you can manually select oneor more of the holes to not be filled.

Reference PathThe Assembly Context dashboard icon defines the shrinkwrap feature in thecontext of the assembly. The External icon enables you to create the featurewithout referencing the assembly.

Module 5 | Page 18 © 2012 PTC

Page 131: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating a Shrinkwrap Feature

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Assembly_Features\Shrinkwrap_Feature SW_FEATURE.ASM

Task 1: Create a new part in the assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters. In the ModelTree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK.

3. Click Create to create a new part in the assembly.4. Select Part and Solid if necessary, then click OK in the Component

Create dialog box.5. Click Browse in the Creation Options dialog box, and double-click

MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT, then click OK.6. Right-click in the graphics window and select Default Constraint.7. Click Complete Component .

Task 2: Add a shrinkwrap feature using the Outer Shell collection method.

1. In the model tree, right-click PRT0001.PRT and select Activate.

2. Click Shrinkwrap from the Get Data group.3. In the dashboard, click the Subset button.

4. In the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser, select the first listing ofBOLT_5–18.PRT, press SHIFT, right-click CONNECTING_ROD.PRT,and select Ignore.

5. Click OK to close the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser.

The selected components are ignored during the creation of theshrinkwrap feature.

© 2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 19

Page 132: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

6. In the dashboard, select the References tab. Notice that you canselect geometry to always include or never include. You can alsoselect curve chains and datum features to include in the feature.Keep the default settings.

7. In the dashboard, select the Options tab.• Select the Exclude then Shrinkwrap radio button.• Edit the Quality Level to 5 and click OK if necessary.• Select the Auto Hole Filling check box.• Select the Ignore Small Surfaces check box and edit theThreshold value to 2.

8. Click Complete Feature .

Task 3: Open PRT0001.PRT and observe the shrinkwrap feature.

1. In the model tree, right-clickPRT0001.PRT and select Open.

2. From the In Graphics toolbar,select Wireframe from theModel Display types drop-downlist. Notice that the featureconsists of surfaces copied fromgeometry in the assembly.

3. In the model tree, right-clickShrinkwrap id 24 and selectDelete. Click OK.

4. Select Shading from theModel Display types drop-downlist and click Close from theQuick Access toolbar.

Task 4: Add a shrinkwrap feature using Auto collect all solid surfaces.

1. In the model tree, right-click PRT0001.PRT and select Activate.

2. Click Shrinkwrap from the Get Data group.3. In the dashboard, click the Subset button.4. In the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser, select the first listing of

BOLT_5–18.PRT, press SHIFT, right-click CONNECTING_ROD.PRT,and select Ignore.

5. Click OK to close the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser.

Module 5 | Page 20 © 2012 PTC

Page 133: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

6. In the dashboard, click OuterShell and select Autocollectall solid surfaces from thecollection drop-down list. ClickYes in the Exclude InternalComponents Window.

7. On the Options tab, click Solidifyresulting geometry.

8. Click Complete Feature .

Task 5: Create a cross-section to verify that the shrinkwrap feature is solid.

1. In the model tree, right-clickPRT0001.PRT and select Open.

2. From the In Graphics toolbar,

click View Manager andselect the Sections tab, ifnecessary.• Click New > Planar. Type Aand press ENTER.

• In the model tree, select datumplane RIGHT.

• Click Complete Feature .

3. Click Close .

Cross-section A shows the shrinkwrap feature is solid.

Task 6: Edit the source models and update the shrinkwrap feature.

1. In the model tree, right-clickCYLINDER.PRT and selectActivate.

2. Expand CYLINDER.PRT.Right-click BOSSES and selectEdit.

3. Edit the dimension value from 51to 71 and click Regenerate .

© 2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 21

Page 134: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

4. In the model tree, right-clickPRT0001.PRT and select Open.

5. In the model tree, right-clickthe shrinkwrap feature and clickUpdate Shrinkwrap. Click Yesin the Warning dialog box.

The length of the bosses inthe shrinkwrap feature haveupdated according to thecylinder model change.

This completes the procedure.

Module 5 | Page 22 © 2012 PTC

Page 135: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating a Shrinkwrap ModelUse the shrinkwrap feature to automatically create a lightweightcopy of a model.

Shrinkwrap Model Methods:

• Surface Subset• Faceted Solid• Merged Solid

Figure 1 – Surface Subset

Figure 2 – Merged Solid Figure 3 – Faceted Solid

Creating a Shrinkwrap ModelA shrinkwrap model is an automatically created, non-associative, simplifiedcopy of a selected part or assembly.To create a shrinkwrap model, open the model you want to shrinkwrap, clickFile > Save A Copy. In the Save A Copy dialog box, select the Shrinkwrapfile type.In the Create Shrinkwrap dialog box, you are then presented with variouscreation methods and geometry definition options for creating the model.

Uses of a Shrinkwrap ModelThere are two main uses for a shrinkwrap model:• To create a simplified model used to share geometry with vendors orcustomers while eliminating any proprietary detail you do not want to share.

• To create a lightweight version of a complex part or assembly to be usedas a reference or packaging model.

Creation MethodsYou can use the following three creation methods when creating a shrinkwrapmodel:

© 2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 23

Page 136: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Surface Subset – A collection of surfaces and datum features thatrepresents the external geometry of a referenced model. The surfacesubset is the fastest shrinkwrap method and results in the smallest modelsize, because it is comprised of only surface geometry.

• Faceted Solid – An approximate, faceted solid model that representsall external surfaces with additional surfaces added to bridge gaps andcomplete the solid.

• Merged Solid – A very accurate solid representation of a source assembly.Components from the source assembly are merged together into a singlepart that represents the solid geometry in all collected components.

Quality LevelYou can edit the relative quality of the shrinkwrap model creation process to avalue between 1 and 10. High quality levels increase processing time, filesize, and the level of detail included in the shrinkwrap model.

Special HandlingYou can adjust the special handling options to control the automatic creationof the shrinkwrap model geometry.

• Fill holes – If selected, this shrinkwrap attribute fills all holes or cuts thatintersect a single surface.

• Ignore Skeletons – If selected, geometry from skeleton models are notincluded in the shrinkwrap model.

• Ignore quilts – If selected, surface quilts are not included in the shrinkwrapmodel.

• Ignore small surfaces – Only available using the Surface Subset method,this attribute enables you to exclude surfaces smaller than a percentageof the model's overall size.

• Assign Mass Properties – Enables you to assign the full assembly's massproperty values to the simplified shrinkwrap model.

Miscellaneous Creation Options• Include Datum References – Used to select datum features from thesource that you want copied into the shrinkwrap model.

• Preview Options – For a Surface Subset shrinkwrap, you can edit thepreview geometry color from real colors to gray-orange colors. Grayidentifies the included surfaces while orange identifies the excludedsurfaces.

• Additional Surfaces – For a Surface Subset shrinkwrap, you can selectgeometry to include with automatically selected surfaces.

• Faceted Solid Options – For a Faceted Solid, select an Output Format ofPart, LW Part, STL, or VRML.

• Additional Components – For a Merged Solid, select additional models toinclude in the set of automatically selected models being merged.

Module 5 | Page 24 © 2012 PTC

Page 137: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creation Method Comparison ChartSurface Subset Faceted Solid Merged Solid

Source Model Part orAssembly

Part orAssembly

Assembly Only

Geometry Type Surface Only Tessellated Solid Accurate Solid

Quality Level Higher qualityincreasesthe numberof surfacesincluded in theShrinkwrap.

Higher qualityincreases theaccuracy of therepresentation.

Higher qualityincreasesnumber ofcomponentsincluded inthe mergeoperation.

Colors Source ColorsRetained

Colors NotRetained

Source ColorsRetained

Ignore SmallSurfs

Yes No No

© 2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 25

Page 138: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating a Shrinkwrap Model

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Assembly_Features\Shrinkwrap_Model SW_MODEL.ASM

Task 1: Save a Surface Subset shrinkwrap model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. Click File > Save As > Save a

Copy.3. In the Save a Copy dialog box,

select Shrinkwrap from the Typedrop-down list and click OK.

4. In the Create Shrinkwrap dialogbox, do the following:• Clear the Fill holes check box.• Select the Assign MassProperties check box.

• Select the Gray-Orange radiobutton.

• Click Preview. Notice theexcluded surfaces highlightedin orange.

• Edit the Quality Level to 4 andclick OK in the Warning dialogbox, if necessary.

• Click Preview.

Notice that because the Quality Level increased, the secondpreview took longer to create and fewer surfaces were excluded.

5. Click OK to create a shrinkwrap model named SW_MODEL_SW0001.PRT.

6. Click Accept Value to accept the default relative accuracy value.

Module 5 | Page 26 © 2012 PTC

Page 139: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Save a Faceted Solid model.

1. In the Create Shrinkwrap dialogbox, do the following:• Select the Faceted Solidcheck box.

• Click Preview.• Edit the Quality Level to 8.• Click Preview.

Because the Quality Level increased, the second preview tooklonger to create and contained much more detail.

2. Click OK to create a shrinkwrap model named SW_MODEL_SW0002.PRT.

Task 3: Save a Merged Solid model.

1. In the Create Shrinkwrap dialogbox, do the following:• Select the Merged Solidcheck box.

• Edit the Quality Level to 6.• Click Preview.

2. Click OK to create a shrinkwrap model named SW_MODEL_SW0003.PRT.

© 2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 27

Page 140: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 4: Compare the three shrinkwrap models.

1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar. SelectSW_COMPARE.ASM and click Open.

2. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No Hidden from the ModelDisplay types drop-down list.

The Surface Subset model is on the left, the Faceted Solid model isin the middle, and the Merged Solid model is on the right.

This completes the procedure.

Module 5 | Page 28 © 2012 PTC

Page 141: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Summarizing Shrinkwrap Features and ModelsThe following is a summary of shrinkwrap feature andshrinkwrap model functionality.

Figure – 1 Surface Subset, Faceted Solid, and Merged Solid Shrinkwraps

Summarizing Shrinkwrap Features and ModelsThis reference table summarizes the functionality found in both shrinkwrapfeatures and shrinkwrap models.

Shrinkwrap Comparison TableShrinkwrap Feature Shrinkwrap Model

GeneralDescription

Automated tool for copyingsurface data from a part orassembly into a feature.

The feature can be createdinternal or external to anassembly.

Automated method forcreating a simplified copyof a part or assembly usingSave A Copy.

Associativity Feature can be dependentor independent of thesource model.

No associativity to thesource model. Shrinkwrapmodel does not update ifthe source model changes.

GeometryType

Surface Subset Only Surface Subset, FacetedSolid, or Merged Solid

MassProperties

Cannot assign massproperties from a sourcemodel.

Can assignmass propertiesfrom a source model.

© 2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 29

Page 142: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Function 1 Create a dependentlightweight representationof a complex part orassembly.

Can be converted to anenvelope and substitutedin a simplified rep.

Create an independentlightweight representationof a complex part orassembly.

Because it is not associatedto the source model, youshould not use it as anenvelope.

Function 2 To share a simplifiedsurface-only model with avendor or customer whileeliminating any proprietarydetails you do not want toshare.

Typically, your vendorsprefer to have solid modelsrather than surface-onlymodels.

To share simplified surface,tessellated, or accuratesolid models with avendor or customer whileeliminating any proprietarydetails you do not want toshare.

Function 3 Create a lightweightsimplified rep by creatinga shrinkwrap feature inthe assembly and thenexcluding everything butthe shrinkwrap feature fromthe Simplified Rep.

Benefits The ability to be dependentor independent of thesource model.

The ability to create surfaceor solid geometry.

Greater control of geometrycreation.

Module 5 | Page 30 © 2012 PTC

Page 143: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module6Replacing Components in an Assembly

Module OverviewCreo Parametric provides a variety of tools for replacing one component in anassembly with another. Some tools automatically replace components basedon preexisting relationships between the components. Some tools requireyou to first create that relationship between the components, before enablingyou to replace unrelated components.

In this module, you learn how to replace components in an assembly, usingall of the tools available in the Replace dialog box.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Replace family table components in an assembly.• Replace reference models in an assembly.• Replace components using the By Copy option.• Replace unrelated components in an assembly.• Replace unrelated components using the Reference Pairing table.• Replace components using an interchange assembly.

© 2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 1

Page 144: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Understanding Component ReplaceCreo Parametric provides many options for efficiently replacingone component with another in an assembly.

Replace By:

• Family Table• Interchange• Reference Model• Layout• By Copy• Unrelated

Figure 1 – Reference Pairing

Figure 2 – With Original ComponentFigure 3 – With Replaced

Component

Understanding Component ReplaceThe Component Replace tool enables you to exchange one component withanother. Tools within the Replace dialog box provide multiple methods forreplacing selected components and managing references between them.

To open the Replace dialog box, click Edit > Replace from the main menu.You can also preselect the component you want to replace, then right-clickand select Replace.

The Replace dialog box remains open, enabling you to select and replacemultiple components. When you are finished replacing components, clickOK to close the dialog box.

Replace and ReferencesTypically, you assemble a component using references between its geometryand other components in the assembly. If you replace a component in anassembly with a new component, you need to specify the geometry that thenew component should reference for placement. For example, you replacea bolt that was assembled to a hole in a block with another bolt. You mustspecify in Creo Parametric the exact geometry for the new bolt to use as theinsert reference or Creo Parametric does not properly position the bolt.

This same rule applies to the assembly that contains the components. If youreplace the block with a new block containing many holes, Creo Parametricdoes not automatically insert the bolt in the correct hole.

Module 6 | Page 2 © 2012 PTC

Page 145: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

In the Replace dialog box, you can select a variety of Replace By tools thatenable you to replace components of different types and requirements. Someof the tools automatically replace a component and all references, whileothers enable you to identify and pair references between the old and newcomponent.

Replacing and substituting components are two different actions.Substitution exchanges one component for another. You performsubstitution in the context of a simplified representation.

Benefits of using Replace By ToolsThe Replace By tools enable you to exchange components in an assembly,while transferring the original component's parent/child relationships to thenew component. By transferring relationships to the new component, youcan significantly reduce the amount of rework that may be required in futureassemblies or drawings.

• Family Table – You can automatically replace any component that is partof a family table with another instance of that family table.

• Interchange – You can automatically replace a member of a functionalinterchange assembly with other members of the same interchangeassembly. You can use interchange assemblies to replace components inmultiple assemblies.

• Reference Model – You can automatically replace components related byinheritance, merge, or shrinkwrap features.

• Layout – You can automatically replace components that are declared to alayout that contains global datums that define assembly intent.

• By Copy – You can copy a current component and replace it with the newcomponent, while maintaining all original assembly relationships.

• Unrelated – You can exchange components that are not related to eachother.

The component that you select determines the Replace By toolsthat appear in the Replace dialog box. For example, the FamilyTable tool is not available if you are replacing a component that isnot a member of a family table.

Best PracticesWhen replacing components, avoid disrupting any future applications byusing the method that best enables you to transfer references between thenew and old model.

© 2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 3

Page 146: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Replacing Components using Family TableYou can automatically replace components that are members ofa family with other members of the table.

Replace By: Family Table

• Family Table Members• Assembly References

Figure 1 – Family TableComponent List

Figure 2 – Original Instance Figure 3 – Replaced Instance

Replacing Components using Family TableYou can automatically replace any component that is part of a family tablewith another instance of that family table.

In the Replace dialog box, click Family Table, then click Open . In theFamily Table dialog box, select a component to replace the current instance.

Assembly ReferencesWhen you automatically replace a component, the children of the originalcomponent may not be able to reference the new component. For example,an instance of a family table may not have the same number of holes as theoriginal instance. In this situation, after replacing the instance, you need toedit the assembly definition to account for fewer holes.

Best PracticesReplacing components by family table is a fast and easy way to swapcomponents in and out of an assembly. This is a common method whenworking with standard hardware libraries that are often created with familytables.

Module 6 | Page 4 © 2012 PTC

Page 147: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Replacing Components using FamilyTable

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Component_Operations\Replace_Family-TableCLAMP_RFT.ASM

Task 1: Replace BOLT_10-15_RFT.PRT with BOLT_10-36_RFT.PRTusing Family Table.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, select

the first instance ofBOLT_10-15_RFT.PRT.

3. Right-click and select Replace.4. In the Replace dialog box, select

Family Table.

5. Click Open in the Replacedialog box.

6. Select BOLT_10-36_RFT.PRTand then click OK in the FamilyTree dialog box.

7. Click OK in the Replace dialogbox.

8. In the model tree, press CTRLand select the three remainingBOLT_10-15_RFT.PRTcomponents.

9. Right-click and select Replace.10. In the Replace dialog box, select

Family Table.

© 2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 5

Page 148: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

11. Click Open in the Replacedialog box.

12. Select BOLT_10-36_RFT.PRTand then click OK in the FamilyTree dialog box.

13. Click OK in the Replace dialogbox.

This completes the procedure.

Module 6 | Page 6 © 2012 PTC

Page 149: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Replacing Components using Reference ModelYou can replace components related by inheritance, merge, orshrinkwrap using the Reference Model method.

Replace By: Reference Model

• Inheritance Feature• Merge Feature• Shrinkwrap Feature

Figure 1 – Cast ModelFigure 2 – Machined Model

Replacing Components using Reference ModelYou can automatically replace any components related by inheritance, merge,or shrinkwrap features using the Reference Model method.

In the Replace dialog box, click Reference Model, then click Open . In theOpen dialog box, select a related reference model.

Assembly ReferencesWhen you automatically replace a component, the children of the originalcomponent may not be able to reference the new component. After the newcomponent has been placed, you may need to edit the assembly to accountfor new or missing assembly references.

Best PracticesReplacing components by reference model is a fast and easy way toexchange components in and out of an assembly. This is a common methodwhen working with standard hardware libraries created using the Inheritancefeature. Also, you can use the Inheritance or Merge feature when creatingvarious machined versions of a cast model. You can then exchange anymodel referencing the cast model in and out of the assembly.

© 2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 7

Page 150: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Replacing Components using ReferenceModel

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Component_Operations\Replace_Reference-ModelRM_MACH.PRT

Task 1: Replace the cast part with the machined part.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, right-click the

External Merge feature andselect Open Base.

The base model referenced by the External Merge feature isRM_CAST.PRT. Geometry from the cast part is merged into themachined part where additional features have been applied.Because these models reference each other, they can bereplaced in an assembly using the Reference Model option.

3. Click Open from the QuickAccess toolbar.

4. Select VALVE_RM.ASM, andclick Open.

5. In the graphics area, selectRM_CAST.PRT.

6. Right-click and select Replace.

7. In the Replace dialog box,ensure Reference Model isselected.

8. Click Open in the Replacedialog box.

9. Click RM_MACH.PRT and clickOpen.

10. Click OK in the Replace dialogbox.

Module 6 | Page 8 © 2012 PTC

Page 151: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

The cast model is replaced by the machined model, yet allrelated components remain assembled.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 9

Page 152: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Replacing Components using By CopyYou can replace components by copying a selected componentin an assembly.

Replace By: By Copy

• New Copy• Name

Figure 1 – Copy to be Replaced

Replacing Components using By CopyWith this method of replacement, you can replace a component with a copyby creating a new component based on a copy of the existing model.

This method is similar to saving a copy in part mode. However, in this case,you are saving a copy in the context of an assembly.

Select one or more components to replace. Right-click, and select Replace.In the Replace dialog box, click By Copy. Edit the name of the newcomponent in the Name field in the New Copy section of the dialog box. Ifyou select multiple components, type a suffix to add to the current nameof each component.

This new copied model is unrelated to the original model. Changesmade to the new component do not affect the original.

Assembly ReferencesBecause this component is an exact copy of the original model, all modelsreferencing the original model now reference the new component.

Best PracticesThis is a great tool for evaluating design changes to selected componentsin an assembly.

Module 6 | Page 10 © 2012 PTC

Page 153: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Replacing Components using By Copy

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Component_Operations\Replace_Copy CLAMP_BYCOPY.ASM

Task 1: Replace the clamp base using the By Copy method.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, click Settings

> Tree Filters. In theModel Tree Items dialog box,select the Features check box.

3. Click OK.4. In the model tree, select

CLAMP_BASE_BYCOPY.PRT.Right-click and select Replace.

5. In the Replace dialog box, selectBy Copy.

6. Edit the Name to clamp_base_2.7. Click OK to complete the

replacement.

Task 2: Edit the new CLAMP_BASE_2.PRT.

1. In the model tree, selectCLAMP_BASE_2.PRT.Right-click and select Activate.

2. In the model tree, expand theCLAMP_BASE_2.PRT node.

3. Select Sketch 1. Right-click andselect Edit.

4. Edit the dimension 80 to 120 andthe dimension 40 to 100.

5. Click Regenerate .6. In the model tree, select

CLAMP_BYCOPY.ASM.Right-click and select Activate.

© 2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 11

Page 154: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

7. Click Open , selectCLAMP_BASE_BYCOPY.PRT,and click Open.

The size of CLAMP_BASE_BYCOPY.PRT has not changed.Only the new CLAMP_BASE_2.PRT has increased in size.

This completes the procedure.

Module 6 | Page 12 © 2012 PTC

Page 155: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Replacing Unrelated ComponentsYou can replace any component with another using the UnrelatedComponent tool.

Replace By: Unrelated

• Assembly References– Edit Ref Table– Reassemble

• Reference Evaluation

Figure 1 – Assembled Componentto Replace Figure 2 – Unrelated Component

Replacing Unrelated ComponentsYou can replace unrelated components by using the Unrelated Componentmethod.

In the Replace dialog box, click Unrelated Component. In the Open dialogbox, select the new component to swap into the assembly.

You can replace parts with sub-assemblies and sub-assemblieswith parts using the Unrelated Component functionality.

Assembly ReferencesThe components you are swapping have no relationship to each other; youmust place the new component and redefine the placement of any componentreferencing the component that was replaced. There are two methods forhandling the new assembly references:

• Reference Pairing – You can click the Edit Ref Table button to createa pairing table. The table contains the placement references from thecomponent that you are replacing and enables you to pair them withgeometry in the new component. By identifying and pairing the newassembly references prior to replacing the original model, you avoidassembly regeneration failures. You can pair references manually orautomatically using the Evaluation tool.

© 2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 13

Page 156: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

You can save the pairing table information with the assembly and use it toreturn the original component to the assembly.

• Reassemble – If you do not assign reference tags in the Reference PairingTable, Creo Parametric automatically opens the assembly dashboard,enabling you to select references to place the new, unrelated component.Then, you should use Edit Definition or Edit References to edit theplacement of any components that have references to the replaced model.

Reference EvaluationIn the Reference Pairing Table, you can click Evaluate to automatically pairreference tags in both models, using a set of evaluation rules. By default,all rules are applied. However, the Evaluation Rules button enables you toconfigure which rules to apply. These evaluation rules include the following:

Figure 3 – Reference Pairing Table

• Same ID (and Type) – Is the most powerful evaluation rule. This optionpairs all component references that are of the same feature ID and type.This rule enables the easy replacement of an unrelated component that wascreated by copying the original model. This evaluation also automaticallypairs datum references that originated in the same template model.

• Component Interfaces – Compares component interfaces from twocomponents and pairs interfaces with the same name. This option isefficient when the same name is given to similar interfaces configuredin each component.

• Same Name (and Type) – Pairs all component references that are of thesame name and type. This option depends on careful planning since youmust consistently name geometric features throughout your projects.

• Same History – Searches for copied data-sharing features from theexisting component in the incoming component. Such features are thenautomatically used as pairs.

• Same Parameters – Searches for all references with the given parametername, type, and value, and automatically pairs those that match.

Best PracticesReplacing components using the Unrelated Component method is usefulbecause it does not require the swapped components to have a predefinedrelationship, such as Reference Model, Family Table, Interchange Assembly

Module 6 | Page 14 © 2012 PTC

Page 157: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

and so on. The Reference Pairing tool enables you to swap unrelatedcomponents and avoid rework to downstream assemblies, drawings, andother applications.

© 2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 15

Page 158: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Replacing Unrelated Components

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Component_Operations\Replace_Unrelated REPL_UNREL.ASM

Task 1: Replace an unrelated component using the Edit Ref Table.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, right-click

CLAMP_BASE_UNREL.PRTand select Replace.

3. In the Replace dialog box, selectUnrelated Component.

4. Click Open .5. Select CLAMP_BASE_CIR.PRT

and click Open.

6. Click Edit Ref Table.7. In the Reference Pairing Table

dialog box, do the following:• Click Evaluate.• Select each tag and observethe paired geometryhighlighted in the displaywindow.

• Click OK.8. Click OK in the Replace dialog

box.

Because CLAMP_BASE_CIR.PRT was originally a copy ofCLAMP_BASE_UNREL.PRT, Creo Parametric automaticallyevaluated and paired their common assembly references.

Task 2: Manually pair references to replace an unrelated component.

1. In the model tree, right-click CLAMP_SHAFT_UNREL.PRT and selectReplace.

2. In the Replace dialog box, select Unrelated Component.

3. Click Open under Select New Component.4. Select IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT and click Open.

Module 6 | Page 16 © 2012 PTC

Page 159: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

5. In the Replace dialog box, click Edit Ref Table.6. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, click Evaluate.7. Notice that only TAG_3 was automatically paired as datum plane

RIGHT.

IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT is not a copy of CLAMP_SHAFT_UNREL.PRT. The only reference that can be automaticallypaired is datum plane RIGHT.

8. Click TAG_0.9. Select a surface in

IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT thatcorresponds to the highlightedTAG_0 reference.

10. Click TAG_1.11. Select a surface in

IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT thatcorresponds to the highlightedTAG_1 reference.

12. Click TAG_2.13. Select a surface in

IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT thatcorresponds to the highlightedTAG_2 reference.

14. Click OK.

15. In the Replace dialog box, clickOK.

If you had not manuallypaired missing references,the assembly dashboardwould have opened,enabling you to redefinethe component's placement.You would also be requiredto edit the definition of anycomponents assembled tothe replaced part.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 17

Page 160: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Understanding Interchange AssembliesInterchange assemblies enable the automatic replacement andsubstitution of components.

Interchange Component Types:

• Functional Component

• Simplify Component

Figure 1 – Pairing References of a Functional Component

Understanding Interchange AssembliesYou can use interchange assemblies to manage components that arefrequently substituted for one another. In the interchange assembly, youcan predefine and save paired references that are used to assemble thecomponents within design assemblies. Creating an interchange assembly isuseful when you have a number of components that are frequently replacedwith one another in many assemblies throughout your enterprise.

There are two types of interchange components that you can add to aninterchange assembly:

• Functional interchange components replace functional components in anassembly.

• Simplify interchange components substitute for components in a simplifiedrepresentation.

Interchange Assembly RulesThe following rules apply to interchange assemblies:

• The first component in an interchange assembly is, by default, a functionalcomponent. Subsequent components can be functional or simplifycomponents.

• You can assemble simplify components to packaged functionalcomponents.

• You cannot assemble functional components to packaged functionalcomponents.

• You can only reference a functional component when creating orassembling a simplify component.

• You cannot reference a simplify component when creating or assemblinganother simplify component.

Module 6 | Page 18 © 2012 PTC

Page 161: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• You can use the same component twice in an interchange assembly, onceas a functional component and once as a simplify component.

• You cannot add another instance of a component if the generic instanceis already in the interchange. You cannot add the generic instance of acomponent if an instance is already in the interchange.

• Interchange assemblies are identified by the .ASM extension; however, youcannot assemble an interchange assembly in a regular design assembly.

Best PracticesA component that is replaced or substituted using an interchange assemblybecomes a child of that interchange assembly. Because of this, theinterchange assembly is a required reference of that assembled component.

Maintaining the interchange assembly is logical if you have a group ofcomponents that are frequently replaced or substituted throughout yourenterprise. If the component is not replaced or substituted frequently, aninterchange assembly may be unnecessary. It is important to ensure thatmaintaining the interchange assembly throughout your product’s lifecycleprovides value to your organization.

© 2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 19

Page 162: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Replacing using a Functional InterchangeAssemblyYou can use functional interchange assemblies to define andsave component replacement references.

Create Reference Tag Features

• Reference Tag Tool• Based on Assembly• Using Evaluate

Figure 1 – Paired Reference Tag

Figure 2 – Selected Reference Tag

Replacing using a Functional Interchange AssemblyA functional interchange assembly is a special assembly subtype that definesautomatic replacement for a set of components.

You can create an interchange assembly by clicking New . Then from theNew dialog box, select Assembly as the type and Interchange as the subtype.

Functional ComponentsAny component that you want to automatically replace is added to theinterchange assembly as a functional component.

You can add functional components by clicking Functional or Createfrom the Component group in the ribbon.

Reference TagsReference tags are features that identify and pair assembly references thatare common to each component in an interchange assembly.

Each reference tag contains a set of references selected from componentsin the interchange assembly. These common references are consideredequivalent when any of these components are replaced by one another in adesign assembly. Each reference tag feature contains one common set ofassembly references.

Module 6 | Page 20 © 2012 PTC

Page 163: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

To create reference tags, click Reference Tag in the Reference Pairinggroup in the ribbon, press CTRL, and select the appropriate reference fromeach component.

Reference Pairing TableThe Reference Pairing table contains tools to automatically create and pairreference tags. To open the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, click RefPairing Table in the Reference Pairing group in the ribbon. Once thedialog box opens, there are two workflows used to create and pair referencetags.

Create and Pair Reference Tags Based on an AssemblyReference tags are automatically created based on how the active componentis referenced in a selected assembly.• Active Component – Select the active component. This is the componentyou want to replace.

• Create Tags based on assembly – Click Open in the ReferencePairing Table dialog box, and select the assembly that you want to use toidentify the required reference tags.

• Create Required Tags – Click Create Required Tags in the ReferencePairing Table dialog box. A tag is created for each reference used by theactive component.

• Pairing – Click the first tag in the list, press CTRL, and select correspondinggeometry from each component in the interchange assembly. Repeat theprocess for each reference tag in the list. Click OK when all referencetags have been paired.

Create and Pair Reference Tags Based on Evaluation RulesReference tags for datum type geometry are automatically created andpaired based on a set of rules.• Active Component – Select the active component.• Components to Pair – Activate the Components to Pair field of the dialogbox, press CTRL, and select each component for which you want to createreference tags.

• Evaluate – In the Evaluate drop-down list, select Evaluate and Create Tags.This automatically populates the tag list with every datum feature found inthe active model. If the rules can find equivalent features in the selected topair components, they are automatically paired. If no pairs are found, youcan manually pair or remove the tags. Click OK when you are finished.You can toggle the display of these rules on and off by clicking theEvaluation Rules button.

Best PracticesA component that you replace using an interchange assembly becomes achild of that interchange assembly. Therefore, the interchange assembly is arequired reference of that assembled component.Maintaining the interchange assembly is logical if you have a group ofcomponents that are frequently replaced or substituted throughout your

© 2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 21

Page 164: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

enterprise. If the component is not replaced or substituted frequently, aninterchange assembly may be unnecessary. It is important to ensure thatmaintaining the interchange assembly throughout your product’s lifecycleprovides value to your organization.

Module 6 | Page 22 © 2012 PTC

Page 165: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Replacing using a Functional InterchangeAssembly

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Component_Operations\Interchange_Functional CARB.ASM

Task 1: Create a functional interchange assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar.• Select Assembly as the type and Interchange as the subtype.• Edit the Name to ic_carb and click OK.

3. In the ribbon, select the Model tab, if necessary. Click Functionalfrom the Component group.

4. In the Open dialog box, select CARB.PRT and click Open.

5. Click Functional .6. In the Open dialog box, select CARB2.PRT and click Open.

7. Click Complete Component .

8. Click Ref Pairing Table fromthe Reference Pairing group.

9. Select CARB.PRT as the ActiveComponent.

10. In the Reference Pairing Tabledialog box, click Open .

11. In the Open dialog box, selectCARB.ASM and click Open.

12. If required, move the models and resize the Reference Pairing Tabledialog box so that you have access to both.

13. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, click Create RequiredTags and then click the newly generated tag, TAG_0.

14. In the graphics window, selectthe reference in CARB2.PRTthat corresponds to theTAG_0 reference displayedin CARB.PRT.

© 2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 23

Page 166: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

15. In the Reference Pairing Tabledialog box, click TAG_1.

16. In the graphics window, selectthe reference in CARB2.PRTthat corresponds to the TAG_1reference.

17. In the Reference Pairing Tabledialog box, click TAG_2.

18. In the graphics window, selectthe reference in CARB2.PRTthat corresponds to the TAG_2reference.

19. In the Reference Pairing Tabledialog box, click TAG_3.

20. In the graphics window, selectthe reference in CARB2.PRTthat corresponds to the TAG_3reference.

21. Click OK.

Task 2: Use the interchange assembly to replace CARB.PRT withCARB2.PRT.

1. Click Windows from theQuick Access toolbar and selectCARB.ASM to activate it.

2. In the model tree, right-clickCARB.PRT and select Replace.

3. In the Replace dialog box, clickOpen .

4. Expand the IC_CARB interface,select CARB2.PRT and click OK.

5. Click OK in the Replace dialogbox.

This completes the procedure.

Module 6 | Page 24 © 2012 PTC

Page 167: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module7Understanding the Basics of SimplifiedReps

Module OverviewYou can reduce the level of geometry detail in complex assemblies byusing simplified representations. You can control which sub-assemblies andcomponents Creo Parametric opens with the top-level assembly. You canexclude certain components, as well as substitute complex components withsimpler representations.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Retrieve assembly subsets.• Understand standard simplified reps.• Understand custom simplified reps.• Use lightweight graphics representations.• Use graphics simplified reps to reduce the memory requirements of anassembly.

• Use geometry simplified reps to reduce the memory requirements of anassembly.

• Exclude components from assemblies using simplified reps.• Define simplified reps using the component chooser.• Create default envelope simplified reps.• Create and use simplified reps of part models.• Open simplified reps directly from the Open dialog box.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 1

Page 168: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Retrieving Assembly SubsetsA subset of assembly components can be retrieved.

Retrieve Subset

• Faster retrieval of large assemblies.• Retrieval Customization dialog box.• Apply places a subset in the main graphics window.• Can save a simplified representation in the main assembly.

Figure 1 – Retrieval Customization Dialog Box

Retrieving Assembly SubsetsWhen opening an assembly, you can retrieve a subset of assemblycomponents. In the Open dialog box, select an assembly and click OpenSubset. This enables faster and smarter retrieval of large assemblies.

Retrieval Customization Dialog BoxObjects selected in the Retrieval Customization dialog box, shown in Figure1, are set to Master Rep, but can be configured as required. The BasicView keeps selection simple and enables you to decide which componentsto retrieve or not to retrieve.The Advanced View enables you to customize component retrieval further byselecting from the following list of retrieval methods:• Master Rep• Exclude

Module 7 | Page 2 © 2012 PTC

Page 169: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Geometry Rep• Graphics Rep• Light Graphics Rep• Boundary Box Rep• Other simplified representation settingsFor large assemblies, you may find it beneficial to search for componentsrather than to browse in the tree structure to select components of interest.You can supply simple text searches in the Search text box. Objects highlightas you type matching names. Additionally, you can access the Search Tooldialog box or select components directly in the main window.

Model Rules can also be used to determine which objects to select. You canevaluate and edit model rules in the Retrieval Customization dialog box.

The Retrieval Customization dialog box has its own In Graphics toolbar andseveral available options, including the following:

• Remove By Size– Uses a scroll bar to set the size.– Toggles between remove small components and remove large

components.– Selects a model to set the size.

• Remove Internal Components

• Remove External Components• Invert Selection• Include Selected Components– Select components inside a 2-D rectangle.– Select components intersected by a 2-D rectangle.

Once you have established the retrieval options for the components, you canclick Apply to place a subset in the main graphics window. Then, you havethe option to save a simplified representation based on the retrieval settings.

This does not replace the Open Rep option, which is still foundin the Open drop-down menu.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 3

Page 170: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Retrieving Assembly Subsets

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Subset NO FILES OPEN

Task 1: Retrieve an assembly subset by selection.

1. Click Open .2. Select ENGINE.ASM. (Do NOT double-click it.)3. Click Open Subset.4. Click Advanced View.

5. Expand the CRANK.ASM node.6. Select CRANKSHAFT.PRT, and

then select the check box.7. Select PISTON.ASM, and then

select the check box.8. Select CONNECTING_ROD.

PRT, and then select the checkbox.

9. The tree display should appearas shown.

10. Orient the model in the previewwindow.

11. Click OK > Yes and pressENTER to accept the defaultsimplified rep name.

12. Disable all Datum Display types.

Module 7 | Page 4 © 2012 PTC

Page 171: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

13. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.• If necessary, select the Simp Rep tab, and notice Rep0001 iscreated.

14. Click Close.

15. Click Close .

16. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Home tab in the ribbon.• Notice that only the retrieved subset *.PRT models are erasedalong with the *.ASM files.

17. Click OK.

Task 2: Retrieve an assembly subset by geometric size.

1. Click Open .2. Select ENGINE.ASM. (Do NOT double-click it.)3. Click Open Subset.4. Click Basic View, if necessary.

5. Click Remove By Size in theRetrieval Customization dialogbox.

6. Drag the slider to the right untilthe cylinder highlights.

7. Drag the slider slightly to the leftuntil the Cylinder is de-selected.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 5

Page 172: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

8. Click Remove LargeComponents .

9. Right-click and select Retrieve.

10. Click OK.

11. Click Close .

12. Click Erase Not Displayed .• Notice only the retrieved subset *.PRT models are erased alongwith the *.ASM files.

13. Click OK.

This completes the procedure.

Module 7 | Page 6 © 2012 PTC

Page 173: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Understanding Standard Simplified RepsSimplified reps enable you to manage memory usage of largeparts and assemblies.

Standard Simplified Reps:

• Default Rep• Master Rep• Boundary Box Rep• Default Envelope Rep• Symbolic Rep• Geometry Rep• Graphics Rep

Figure 1 – Geometry RepMeasurement

Figure 2 – Graphics Rep Display Figure 3 – Master Rep Dimensions

Understanding Standard Simplified RepsFor every Creo Parametric part and assembly, you find a list of standardsimplified reps in the view manager. You can use these standard reps tohelp manage the amount of system memory required to open and work withlarge parts and assemblies.For example, using boundary box, default envelope, symbolic, graphics orgeometry reps increases system performance, because these reps requireless memory to open and manipulate than a master rep.The standard simplified rep types found in Creo Parametric are as follows:• Default Rep – The default rep and the master rep are initially identical,however:– The default rep type is only available in assemblies.– You can edit and save a default rep. You can temporarily edit, but not

save, other standard representations.– If you edit and save the default rep, the assembly always opens in the

default rep state.• Master Rep – The master rep is the default representation of a CreoParametric model. It contains all geometry and features.

• Boundary Box Rep – The boundary box rep contains no geometry orfeatures, only a wireframe bounding box identifying the overall size andlocation of the assembly. The boundary box rep is best used to simplify therepresentation of a selected part or sub-assembly within another simplifiedrep.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 7

Page 174: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Default Envelope Rep – The default envelope rep enables you torepresent an assembly with an envelope part. A pre-existing envelope canbe selected as the default envelope. If no envelope exists, Creo Parametricenables you to create a default envelope on-the-fly.

• Symbolic Rep – The symbolic rep enables you to simplify an assemblyby representing it as a datum point and symbol. It contains no geometryor features.

• Geometry Rep – A geometry rep contains a model's full, solid geometricdefinition, but without feature content. Compared with graphics reps,geometry reps require slightly more memory and time to retrieve.You can use geometry reps to perform the following tasks:– Obtain measurement information.– Calculate mass properties.– Reference other assembly components.

• Graphics Rep – This representation type contains no geometry or features.This rep contains only display information. The graphics rep requiresminimal memory to open and view. You cannot modify or referencegraphics reps; you can only view them.

Opening and Activating Simplified RepsYou can open an existing simplified representation by clicking the Open Repbutton at the bottom of the Open dialog box. This enables you to open largemodels without first opening the master rep.

In the view manager, you can toggle between different representations bydouble-clicking their name.

Simply editing a master rep to a graphics rep does not reduce theamount of memory used by the system. Models from the masterrep stay in session until you erase them by clicking File > ManageSession > Erase Not Displayed.

Things to Know About Simplified RepsWhen working with simplified reps, you should know the following:• Updating Geometry and Graphics Reps – Geometry and graphics repsof edited models do not update until you save the edited model.

• Graphics Display Control – The save_model_display CONFIG.prooption controls the level of display saved in a model. The defaultshading_lod option is typically satisfactory for most designs; however,some organizations may want to investigate the performance and file sizesprovided by the other options.– shading_lod – The default setting. This option saves all levels of detail

according to the setting in the View Performance dialog box.– wireframe – Saves only wireframe information for the graphics display of

all models.– shading_high – Saves a high level of shaded detail with the model.– shading_low – Saves a low level of shaded detail with the model.

Module 7 | Page 8 © 2012 PTC

Page 175: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Understanding Custom Simplified RepsYou can create custom simplified reps for better performance,visualization, and workability.

Simplified Rep Status Types:

• Exclude• Master Rep• Assembly Only• Geometry• Graphics• Boundary Box• Default Envelope• Symbolic• User Defined Figure 1 – User Defined Type

Figure 2 – Simplified Content Figure 3 – Reduced Clutter

Understanding Custom Simplified RepsTo create a new customized simplified rep, you can apply a status to selectedcomponents of an assembly. You can configure these custom reps to improveperformance or to make working with an assembly easier.Simplified reps are configured views of a part or assembly. You should neveruse them to create a new assembly or part numbers.Customized simplified reps provide the following two primary benefits:• Increase system performance by managing the number or complexity ofcomponents in an assembly. Simplified representations accomplish thisby removing unnecessary components or features from a model, thusreducing the memory required to open and work with the model.

• Customize a model for a specific task. You can use simplifiedrepresentations to remove components that are unnecessary or notdesired while performing specific tasks. For example, you can use thesimplified rep functionality to easily exclude components from view that areobstructing your view or access to other components.

Simplified Rep StatusEvery simplified rep has a default status applied to its top level. For example,a geometry rep has the Geometry Only status applied to its top level. Thegraphics rep has the Graphics Only status applied to its top level.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 9

Page 176: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

You can create custom simplified reps by editing the default status applied tothe top level of a rep, along with the status applied to individual componentsin the rep. For example, you can create a rep with a default status of GraphicsOnly where only one part in the rep has the Master Rep status applied to it.

You can apply various statuses to create custom simplified reps. You canapply a status from the following list to the top level, default condition, and/orto individual components of an assembly.

• Exclude – Select components to exclude from the assembly without regardfor parent-child relationships. Memory usage is significantly reducedby excluding components from an assembly and then erasing thosecomponents from memory.

• Master Rep – Select components to represent in their default status. Allgeometry and features are present.

• Assembly Only – Select assemblies without any components to represent.Only assembly features are present.

• Geometry – Select components to represent as solid geometry containingno feature information. You can calculate measurement, mass property,and interference information with geometry reps. You can edit andreference component placement.Geometry reps require less system memory than master reps.

• Graphics – Select components to represent graphically only. Componentsare visible, but you cannot measure or calculate mass properties fromthese representations.Graphics reps require less system memory than geometry reps.

• Boundary Box – Select components to represent by their boundary boxrepresentation.Boundary box reps require even less system memory than graphics reps.

• Default Envelope – Select a sub-assembly to substitute with a simplifiedenvelope part that represents the assembly.

• Symbolic – Select components to represent by a symbolic representation.A 2-D symbol must be previously defined to replace the components.Like boundary box reps, symbolic reps require less system memory thangraphics reps.

• User Defined – Select components to substitute with a custom simplifiedrep of that component. You cannot substitute standard simplified reps.

Creating and Editing Custom Simplified RepsUse the following select and set status workflow to either create or editcustom simplified reps:

• Select a component(s) in the model tree or graphics window to which youwish to apply a status.

• Right-click and select Set Representation to to apply a status to theselected component(s). This action marks the current rep as modified.

• Save the modified simplified rep in the view manager. Once saved, youcan toggle between various simplified reps.To revert to the representation as it was prior to your edits, double-clickthe modified rep rather than save it.

Module 7 | Page 10 © 2012 PTC

Page 177: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Simplified Reps DescriptionThe description for each custom simplified rep can be edited to describe thecontent of the rep. When you cursor over a simplified rep name in the viewmanager or in the Open Rep tool, the description is displayed as a tool tip. Adescription makes it easier for other users of your assembly to understandwhat is contained in the simplified rep you created and how it may be usefulto them.

Use one of the following two methods to open the Description dialog box andedit the description of a custom simplified rep:

• Right-click the representation’s name in the view manager and selectDescription.

• Select a rep in the view manager and then click Edit > Description from theview manager.

In the Description dialog box, you can edit the default description manuallyand then close the dialog box. You can also erase the existing description,insert a description from a text file, and save the description to a text file.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 11

Page 178: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Lightweight Graphics RepresentationsLightweight graphics representations use less system resourcesthan standard graphics representations.

• Sub-assembly boundary boxes.• Can drag components.

Figure 1 – Light GraphicsRep Model Tree

Figure 2 – Default Light Graphics RepFigure 3 – Configured Light

Graphics Rep

Lightweight Graphics RepresentationsLightweight graphics representations use less system resources thanstandard graphics representations. You can open a light graphicsrepresentation by clicking Open > Open Light Graphics in the Open dialogbox.

Each sub-assembly is retrieved as a Boundary Box Rep, but can be toggledto a Graphics Rep to make it visible in the graphics area. Components in alight graphics rep can also be dragged.

Module 7 | Page 12 © 2012 PTC

Page 179: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Lightweight Graphics Representations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Lightweight_Graphics NO FILES OPEN

Task 1: Open a lightweight geometry representation.

1. Click Open .2. Select ENGINE.ASM. (Do NOT

double-click it.)3. Click Open > Open Light

Graphics.• Notice that sub-assemblygraphics are not shown.

4. Right-click CYLINDER.PRT inthe model tree.

5. Select Set Representation to >Boundary Box.

6. Right-click CRANK.ASM in themodel tree.

7. Select Set Representation to >Graphics.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 13

Page 180: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

8. Right-click PISTON.ASM in themodel tree.

9. Select Set Representation to >Graphics.

10. Press CTRL+ALT and drag theflywheel.

This completes the procedure.

Module 7 | Page 14 © 2012 PTC

Page 181: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Using Graphics Simplified RepsUse standard lightweight graphics simplified reps to managememory usage of large assemblies.

Graphics Representations:

• Lightweight, minimal memoryrequirements

• Boundary box highlighting• On Demand• Backup references

Figure 1 – Bounding Box ofGraphics Rep

Using Graphics Simplified RepsA graphics representation contains no geometry or part features, only amodel's display information. Because a graphics representation contains onlygraphical information, you can only use it for model display.The graphics rep requires minimal memory, enabling you to easily open andview large models.Graphics reps are easily identified in an assembly. When you move yourcursor over a component with its status set to graphics rep, the componenthighlights with a wireframe bounding box representing the overall size ofthe model.

Simply activating a graphics rep does not reduce the amount ofmemory the system uses. Models stay in session until you erasethem by clicking File > Manage Session > Erase Unused ModelReps.

On DemandBy default, On Demand functionality is enabled in Creo Parametric. OnDemand functionality automatically brings required models into sessionbased on actions applied to a model. For example, if you attempt to measurean edge of a model in a graphics rep, Creo Parametric automatically opensthe master rep of that model so you can measure it. When you finish themeasure operation, you can erase the master rep from memory.

Backup ReferencesYou have the option to save placement references of a component in theassembly. This enables component placement updates in the absence

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 15

Page 182: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

of component geometry. This also enhances the use of graphics reps byminimizing the need to retrieve geometry representations of components thatcontain placements effected by a design change.

You can store placement references for selected models by selecting BackupReferences from the shortcut menu. You can also store placement referenceswhile placing or redefining a component.

The auto_backup_new_placemnt_refs CONFIG.pro option enablesautomatic placement reference storage of newly placed components. TheOn Demand assembly settings option Retrieve backed up references mustbe disabled so that references are retrieved from the assembly and not theassembled component.

The graphics simplified reps functionality is most beneficial for verylarge assemblies. There is a negligible benefit to using it with smallor average size assemblies.

Module 7 | Page 16 © 2012 PTC

Page 183: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Using Graphics Simplified Reps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Graphics GRAPHICS.ASM

Task 1: Compare the models that are in session when using the masterrep and the graphics rep of the assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click Open . In the Opendialog box, select In Session

.3. Notice that every component

of the assembly is opened insession memory. Click Cancelto close the dialog box.

4. Click File > Manage Session > Object List .5. Scroll in the INFORMATION WINDOW and notice that each

component is listed as being open in session.6. Click Close in the INFORMATION WINDOW.

7. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.8. In the view manager, double-click Graphics Rep to activate the rep

and then click Close.

9. Cursor over the assembly in thegraphics area.Notice that as you pass overeach component, it is identifiedas a graphics rep by thehighlighted bounding box.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 17

Page 184: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

10. Click File > Manage Session > Object List.11. Scroll in the INFORMATION WINDOW and notice that both a master

rep and graphics rep of each part are listed as open in session.12. Click Close in the INFORMATION WINDOW.13. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Unused Model Reps to

remove all models not currently displayed from session.14. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed to remove all

models not currently displayed from session.15. The Erase Not Displayed dialog box lists all models not included in

the graphics rep. Click OK to confirm their removal.

16. Click Open . In the Open dialog box, select In Session .17. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.18. Click File > Manage Session > Object List.19. Scroll in the INFORMATION WINDOW and notice that each part is

listed as open in session as a graphics rep.20. Click Close in the INFORMATION WINDOW.

When the graphics rep is in session, none of the part modelsare in session. This is the reason that graphics reps are usefulfor improving system performance when working with largeassemblies.

Task 2: Enable On Demand to bring required models into session.

1. In the ribbon, select the Analysistab.

2. Click Length from theMeasure group drop-downmenu, select the frame, and thenselect the edge of the frame, asshown in the figure.

3. Click Open . In the Opendialog box, select In Session

.

4. Notice that FRAME.PRT is now in session. Click Cancel to closethe dialog box.

5. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Unused Model Reps toremove FRAME.PRT from session.

A graphics rep is a lightweight, graphical representation of amodel. It does not contain the geometry required to analyze themodel.

Module 7 | Page 18 © 2012 PTC

Page 185: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 3: Create a simplified rep containing both master and graphics reps.

1. In the model tree, right-clickENGINE.ASM and click SetRepresentation to > Master.

2. Cursor over the assembly andnotice that the engine parts areno longer highlighted by thegraphics rep bounding box.

3. Click View Manager .4. Right-click Graphics Rep(+) and select Save.5. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field

to master_engine and click OK.6. Click Close from the view manager.7. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed to remove all

models not currently displayed from session.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 19

Page 186: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Using Geometry Simplified RepsUse standard geometry simplified reps to manage memoryusage of large assemblies.

Geometry Representations:

• Lightweight, reduced memoryrequirements

• Full solid geometric definition• No part features or dimensions• On Demand

Figure 1 – Interference Checkwith Geometry Reps

Using Geometry Simplified RepsA geometry representation contains a model's full solid geometric definition,but without feature content. Because a geometry representation containssolid geometry, you can use it to do the following:

• Obtain measurement information.• Calculate mass properties.• Reference other assembly components.A geometry rep requires less memory to open than a full featured master rep,but more memory than a graphics rep.

Simply activating a graphic or geometry rep does not reduce theamount of memory the system uses. Models stay in session untilyou erase them by clicking File > Manage Session > Erase NotDisplayed.

On DemandBy default, On Demand functionality is enabled in Creo Parametric. OnDemand functionality automatically brings required models into sessionbased on actions applied to a model. For example, if you attempt to edita dimension in a geometry rep, Creo Parametric automatically opens themaster rep of that model so you can access its features. When you finish theedit, you can erase the master rep from memory.

Module 7 | Page 20 © 2012 PTC

Page 187: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Using Geometry Simplified Reps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Geometry GEOMETRY.ASM

Task 1: Edit the Master_Engine rep so that the blower assemblycomponents are geometry reps.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, click Settings

> Tree Filters.3. In the Model Tree Items dialog

box, select the Features checkbox.

4. Click OK.5. Click File > Manage Session >

Object List from the main menu.6. Scroll in the INFORMATION

WINDOW and notice that eachcomponent is listed as open insession.

7. Click Close in theINFORMATION WINDOW.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 21

Page 188: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

8. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.9. In the view manager, double-click Master_Engine to activate the rep.10. In the model tree, right-click BLOWER.ASM and click Set

Representation to > Geometry.11. Right-click Master_Engine(+) and select Save.12. Click OK in the Save Display Elements dialog box.13. Click Close from the view manager.14. Click File > Manage Session > Object List.15. Scroll in the INFORMATION WINDOW and notice that a mixture of

master, graphics, and geometry reps are now open in session.

The IMPELLER_HOUSING and BOLT_5 are in session asmaster, geometry, and graphics reps. This means that in additionto the master rep using system memory, the geometry andgraphics reps are using additional memory. For this reason, itis important to remove unnecessary reps from memory as oftenas possible.

16. Click Close in the INFORMATION WINDOW.17. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed to remove all

models not currently in the rep.

Task 2: Check for interferences in the Master_Engine rep.

1. In the ribbon, select the Analysistab.

2. Click Global Interferencefrom the Inspect Geometrygroup.

3. Click Preview in the GlobalInterference dialog box.

4. Click Show All to see theinterferences between each ofthe BOLT_5.PRT models andFLANGE.PRT.

5. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Geometry reps contain the geometry required to performanalyses such as interference checks and measurements. Theydo not contain the features and dimensions required to edit themodel.

Module 7 | Page 22 © 2012 PTC

Page 189: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 3: Edit the flange part to eliminate the interferences.

1. In the model tree, expand BLOWER.ASM, and then expandFLANGE.PRT.

Because the status of FLANGE.PRT is currently set to geometryrep, there are no features shown when you expand the model.

2. Right-click FLANGE.PRT and select Activate.

On Demand functionality opens the master rep of FLANGE.PRTwhen it is activated, giving you access to the part's features.

3. In the model tree, expandPattern 1 of Hole 1. Right-clickany of the Hole 1 features andselect Edit.

4. Edit the diameter value 2.8 to 3and click Regenerate .

5. Right-click GEOMETRY.ASM and select Activate.

6. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.7. Double-click Master_Engine(+) to reset it and click Close.8. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 23

Page 190: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Excluding Components using Simplified RepsYou can exclude components from a simplified rep for betterassembly performance and accessibility.

Exclude Components:

• Without regard for parent-child relationships.• For better performance.• For better access.

Figure 1 – Master RepFigure 2 – With Excluded

Components

Excluding Components using Simplified RepsYou can remove components from a simplified rep using the Exclude status.You can exclude components to reduce memory usage or provide betteraccess when working in an assembly.

Removing components from an assembly using the Exclude status in asimplified rep provides benefits not found using other methods:

• Layers or Hide – You can hide components from display using the Hide orLayer tool; however, hidden components remain in system memory. Thismethod does not improve system performance of large assemblies.

• Suppress or Delete – You can remove components from regeneration andsystem memory using suppress and delete; however, this method requiresthat you manage parent-child relationships.

• Exclude – You can exclude components from regeneration and systemmemory without regard for parent-child relationships. Also, you cantoggle between saved simplified reps without having to recreate eachrepresentation.

Simply excluding a component does not reduce the amount ofmemory used by the system. Models stay in session until you erasethem by clicking File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.

Module 7 | Page 24 © 2012 PTC

Page 191: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Excluding Components using SimplifiedReps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Exclude EXCLUDE.ASM

Task 1: Exclude components from the assembly to create a simplified rep.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the graphics area, select the

red IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT.3. Right-click and select Select

Parent.4. Right-click and select Set

Representation to > Exclude toexclude the BLOWER.ASM.

5. In the model tree, press CTRLand select the eight BOLT_8.PRTmodels.

6. In the ribbon, click ManageViews > Set Representation to

> Exclude .

7. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar.

8. In the list of simplified reps,notice that the Master Repis now followed by a plus (+)symbol, indicating that it hasbeen modified.

9. Right-click and select Save.

10. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep fieldto no_blower and click OK.

11. In the Names list, right-click No_Blower and select Description.

12. Click Erase .

13. Click Insert and double-click no_blower.txt.14. Click Save Text .15. In the Names list of the view manager, cursor over No_Blower.

Notice the tool tip displaying the description you just added.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 25

Page 192: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Create a new simplified rep by editing the current simplified rep.

1. With the view manager still open,expand ENGINE.ASM in themodel tree.

2. Press CTRL and selectCARBURETOR.PRT,MUFFLER.PRT, andENGINE_COVER.PRT.

3. Right-click and select SetRepresentation to > Exclude.

The No_Blower simplified rep is now followed by a plus (+) symbol,indicating that it has been modified.

4. Right-click in the view manager and select Save.5. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field

to No_Blower_2 and click OK.6. Click Close to close the view manager.7. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.

The Erase Not Displayed dialog box lists each componentexcluded from the simplified rep. To improve systemperformance, you can erase these components from systemmemory.

8. Click OK to erase the listed components from system memory.

Task 3: Edit and then restore the current active simplified rep.

1. Select ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT,right-click and select SetRepresentation to > Exclude.

2. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar.

3. In the viewmanager, double-clickNo_Blower_2(+) to restore themodified rep to its previouscondition.

You can temporarily modify and then restore any simplified rep to itssaved condition by double-clicking the modified rep name.Temporarily excluding components from display in this manner is auseful tool for working with assemblies.

This completes the procedure.

Module 7 | Page 26 © 2012 PTC

Page 193: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Defining Simplified Reps Using the ComponentChooserUse the component chooser to preview and select componentswhen defining a simplified rep.

Component Chooser:

• Structure Tree• Preview Window• Derived Status• Default Exclude

Figure 1 – Component Chooser

Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component ChooserWhen you select New or Redefine on the Simp Rep tab of the view manager,the component chooser opens. Use the dynamic preview and selection toolsin the component chooser to create and edit simplified reps.

The Component Chooser Dialog BoxThe component chooser contains a variety of tools used to configure asimplified rep:

• Model Tree – On the left side of the chooser, you view a tree structure.From the tree, you can multi-select components and apply statuses tothem. As statuses are edited in the structure tree, the preview windowupdates accordingly.Apply statuses to selected models using the following methods:

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 27

Page 194: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

– Click a component status and select a new status from the drop-downlist.

– Right-click a component name and select a status from theRepresentation shortcut menu.

– Use the check box next to each component in the tree to easily togglestatuses or reset the rep. An assembly with components of differentstatuses is considered mixed and is indicated by a filled check box.

• Model Graphics – On the right side of the chooser, you view the previewwindow. As edits are made to the status of models in the tree, the modeldisplayed in the preview window is updated accordingly. If you select acomponent in the preview window, that component is also selected in thestructure tree.

• Undo and Redo – The undo and redo buttons enable you to undo andredo statuses applied in the current session of the component chooser.

• Find – The Find field provides a quick and easy way to search for andselect components in the structure tree. For example, if you type bolt, everycomponent starting with the word bolt is selected in the structure tree.

• Select – From the Select menu, you can use Advanced Search or theSelect in main window tool to select components in the main window.

• Model Rules – From the Model Rules menu, you can click Evaluate Rulesor Edit Rules to view rules associated with the rep.

• Settings – From the Settings drop-down menu in the modeltree section, you can expand or collapse the model tree. You can alsoedit the column display in the structure tree and save the structure treeto a text file.

• Show – The preview window defaults to Show: Active components in thewindow. You can set the preview to Show: Inactive or Show: Envelopes.

From the Settings drop-down menu in the model graphics section,you can toggle Auto update preview off for better performance whenworking with very large assemblies.

• Layout – Edit the position of the preview window to be below, above, right,or left of the structure tree.

Derived StatusA Derived status indicates that a component's status is a driven status. Thederived status changes when the driving component’s status is edited. Forexample, if components of an assembly are set to Master Rep (Derived) andthe status of the assembly is edited to Graphics Rep, all components in theassembly change to Graphics Rep (Derived).

Default StatusWhen you create a new simplified rep, the default simplified rep rule isExclude. This simplifies large assembly management by eliminatingunintentional retrieval of a new representation where all parts are setto Master Rep. You can easily edit the default rule of a new simplifiedrepresentation by selecting the top assembly in the component chooser andediting its status to Master Rep.

Module 7 | Page 28 © 2012 PTC

Page 195: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Defining Simplified Reps Using theComponent Chooser

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Chooser CHOOSER.ASM

Task 1: Create a simplified rep with a default status of Exclude.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. From the In Graphics toolbar,

click View Manager . ClickNew on the Simp Rep tab.

3. Edit the name to inside andpress ENTER.

The default status at the top level of a new simplified rep isExclude. Every component in the rep has an Exclude (Derived)status applied.

4. In the Edit:INSIDE component chooser, do the following:

• Click Settings and click Expand All.• In the structure tree, double-click the check boxesnext to CRANKSHAFT.PRT, PISTON_ASSY.ASM,ENGINE_COVER.PRT, and IMPELLER.PRT to set their statusto Master Rep.

• Click OK to complete the rep.

As you edit the status of components to Master Rep, eachdisplays in the preview window of the component chooser.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 29

Page 196: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Create a simplified rep with a default status of Master Rep.

1. In the view manager, click New.2. Edit the name to outside and press ENTER.

3. In the Edit:OUTSIDE component chooser, do the following:

• Click Settings and click Expand All.• In the model tree section of the dialog box, right-clickCHOOSER.ASM and click Set Representation to > Master. Thissets the default status of the entire assembly to Master Rep.

• In the Find field of the dialog box, type bolt.• Right-click any of the highlighted bolt parts and click SetRepresentation to > Exclude.

• Right-click CRANKSHAFT.PRT and select Set Representationto > Exclude.

• Set the status of PISTON_ASSY.ASM to Exclude by double-clickingthe check box next to its name.

• Set the status of IMPELLER.PRT to Exclude using either theright-click or double-click methods.

• Click OK to complete the rep.

The parts in PISTON_ASSY.ASM have their status set toExclude (Derived), indicating that they derive their status fromPISTON_ASSY.ASM.

Task 3: Redefine the Outside rep to exclude the carburetor model.

1. In the view manager, right-click Outside and select Redefine.2. In the component chooser, click Select > Select in main window.

Module 7 | Page 30 © 2012 PTC

Page 197: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

3. Select CARBURETOR.PRT, asshown in the figure.

4. ClickOK in the Select dialog box.5. Notice that CARBURETOR.PRT

is now highlighted in thestructure tree. Right-clickCARBURETOR.PRT and clickSet Representation to >Exclude.

6. At the top of the structure tree, select the check box next toCHOOSER.ASM.

7. The ATTENTION dialog box confirms whether or not you want tochange the status of all sub-models to Master Rep. Click Cancel.

8. Right-click CHOOSER.ASM andclick Set Representation to >Graphics.

The default status of the repand all derived models isnow Graphics Rep.

9. Click OK to complete the rep.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 31

Page 198: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating a Default Envelope Simplified RepUse the Default Envelope status to create a simplified rep thatrepresents an assembly with a single part.

Default Envelope Rep

Default Envelope Status

• Automated Process• Envelope Part• Shrinkwrap Feature

Figure 1 – Complete AssemblyFigure 2 – Single Solid

Envelope Part

Creating a Default Envelope Simplified RepEach assembly contains a standard simplified rep named Default EnvelopeRep. You can create a default envelope part that this standard rep uses torepresent the entire assembly. There is also a Default Envelope status thatcan be applied to any assembly. The Default Envelope status enables you tocreate custom reps that use a selected default envelope part.

The geometry in the default envelope part is created using an associativeshrinkwrap feature. You control the subset of components that contribute tothe shrinkwrap feature, as well as the detail of geometry collected. Whenclosed volumes of surface geometry are collected, the shrinkwrap featurecan be made solid. Then, you can substitute the simplified rep containingenvelope geometry into higher level assemblies.

Bottom-Up or Top-Down CreationDefault envelope simplified reps can be created using either a bottom-upor top-down process:• Bottom-Up – Create the default envelope simplified rep in a sub-assemblybefore you use it in a higher level assembly. In the higher level assembly,you substitute the fully defined sub-assembly with the default envelopesimplified rep.

Module 7 | Page 32 © 2012 PTC

Page 199: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Top-Down – If no default envelope simplified rep exists for a selectedsub-assembly, you can easily create a default envelope simplified rep whenneeded in a higher level assembly. The default envelope simplified repof the sub-assembly is created in the sub-assembly and simultaneouslyused in the higher level assembly.

Creating a Default Envelope Simplified RepYou create a default envelope simplified rep by activating an undefinedstandard Default Envelope Rep in the view manager or by setting the defaultstatus of an assembly to Default Envelope.

If the assembly already contains a default envelope(s), you select the oneyou wish to use in the Select envelope dialog box.

Default envelopes can be created in the Envelope dialog box. Openthe dialog box by selecting the View tab and clicking EnvelopeManager from the Manage Views drop-down menu.

If the assembly does not contain a default envelope, an automated processbegins to create the simplified rep, the default envelope, and the shrinkwrapfeature used to define the geometry of the envelope.

• In the Default envelope dialog box, type the following:– Envelope Name - The name of the envelope.– Part Name - The name of the part contained in the envelope.– Common Name - You can type a common name for the part if desired.

• Select the template model to be used to create the envelope part.• Use the shrinkwrap feature to collect geometry that defines geometry of theenvelope. At this stage in the process, you determine the subset of modelsthe shrinkwrap feature will reference when collecting geometry. You canalso define the amount of geometry detail to be collected using settingson the Options tab.

• Close the Simplified Rep component chooser to complete the creation ofthe rep.

Best PracticesTypically, the intent of a simplified rep is to reduce the amount of data insession, yet still provide the detail required for completing tasks using theassembly. Limiting the subset of components referenced by the shrinkwrapfeature is one way to reduce memory requirements of an envelope part. Also,a solid shrinkwrap feature requires more memory than the default surfaceshrinkwrap and should only be used when required.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 33

Page 200: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating a Default Envelope SimplifiedRep

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Default-Rep ENV_REP.ASM

Task 1: Begin defining the standard Default Envelope Rep.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters....3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Envelope Components

check box.4. Click OK.

5. From the In Graphics toolbar, click View Manager . Double-clickDefault Envelope Rep on the Simp Rep tab.

6. In the Default envelope dialogbox, do the following:• Edit the Envelope Name tosolid_outer.

• Edit the Part Name tosolid_outer_env.

• Click OK.

7. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box to complete the creationof the envelope part.

8. Click OK in the Info dialog box, if necessary.

Module 7 | Page 34 © 2012 PTC

Page 201: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Create the shrinkwrap feature in the envelope part.

1. In the shrinkwrap creation dashboard, click the Subset button.2. In the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser, do the following:

• Set the derived status of the assembly to Ignore by selecting thecheck box next to ENV_REP.ASM in the structure tree.

• Click twice in the check boxes next to ENG_BLOCK_REAR.PRT,ENG_BLOCK_FRONT.PRT, CYLINDER.PRT, and CRANK.ASM toset their statuses to Consider.

• Click OK to close the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser.

3. In the shrinkwrap dashboard,select theOptions tab and selectthe Solidify resulting geometrycheck box.

4. Click Complete Feature .5. Click Close from the view

manager.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 35

Page 202: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

6. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden Line from the ModelDisplay types drop-down menu to verify that the envelope model issolid.

7. Select Shading from the Model Display types drop-down menu.8. Cursor over the envelope model and notice that it highlights as a

single solid component. Notice the envelope at the bottom of themodel tree.

9. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed. Notice thatonly the envelope part is left in memory after completing this step.

10. Click OK to erase the models from memory.

By default, envelope models are always displayed in the modeltree. Envelope models never appear in BOMs or in the assemblyunless they are substituted into a simplified rep.

This completes the procedure.

Module 7 | Page 36 © 2012 PTC

Page 203: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Part Simplified RepsYou can substitute part simplified reps in assembly levelsimplified reps.

Part Simplified Reps:

• Attributes• Features• Work Region• Surfaces

Figure 1 – Copied Surfaces

Figure 2 – Work Region Figure 3 – Excluded Features

Creating Part Simplified RepsLike assemblies, every Creo Parametric part contains a set of standardsimplified reps. You can use geometry, graphics, and symbolic reps of a partto reduce the memory required to open a part.You can create and use customized part simplified reps to do the following:• Reduce the time required to open complex parts.• Reduce complexity of a model.• Create work regions or cutouts in the part that can be viewed in assemblysimplified reps.

• Create a different representation or display of a component. You can viewthis simplified rep in part mode, substitute it into an assembly, or placeit in a drawing view.

Like assembly simplified reps, you should never use part simplified repsto create new part numbers.The workflow and options available for creating part simplified reps are muchdifferent than those found in an assembly simplified rep. To create a new part

simplified rep, click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar. Onthe Simp Rep tab, click New.Type a name for the new simplified rep and press ENTER. This opens theEDIT METHOD menu manager where you can define properties of the newrep, such as the following:

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 37

Page 204: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Attributes – Select attributes to control the creation and updating of thesimplified rep. Attributes are as follows:– Include Feat – By default, all features are included in the rep unless

selected to be excluded.– Exclude Feat – By default, all features are excluded from the rep unless

selected to be included.– Regenerate – Always recreate the simplified rep by regenerating the

master rep.– Accelerate – Use the accelerator file to speed up retrieval of simplified

reps.– Whole Model – Include all feature information in the simplified rep.– GeomSnpshot – The representation is a geometry only model; it

includes no feature information and is only available when used with theAccelerate attribute.

• Features – Select features to be excluded or included in the model. Theavailable status, either Exclude or Include, is dependent on the statusapplied in the Attribute element.

• Work Region – Create a cut feature to remove material from the model. Awork region cut is only visible in the simplified rep.

• Surfaces – Select surfaces from the model to be visible in the simplifiedrep. Using this option ensures that all part features are automaticallyexcluded from display.

Substituting Part Simplified RepsThe User Defined option of an assembly simplified rep enables you tosubstitute a selected part with one of its simplified reps. This can be a rep thatreduces feature count in a model, only includes surface selected geometrysurfaces, or contains a work region cutout.

Best PracticesPart simplified reps are best used for creating work regions to display inassembly simplified reps. In rare situations, you can use part simplified repsfor large complicated models.

Module 7 | Page 38 © 2012 PTC

Page 205: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Part Simplified Reps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Part ENGINE_BLOCK. PRT

Task 1: Create an exclude simplified rep in ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Start the View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar and clickNew.

3. Type no_fins_ribs as the new rep name and press ENTER.

4. In the menu manager, clickFeatures.

5. In the model tree, select thegroups FIN_PATTERN andRIBS.

6. Click Done and Done/Returnfrom the menu manager.

Task 2: Create a work region simplified rep in ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT.

1. Double-click Master Rep and click New.2. Type cutaway as the new rep name and press ENTER.3. In the menu manager, click Work Region and Done.

4. In the model tree, select theCUTAWAY_SKETCH sketchfeature.

5. In the dashboard, edit the depthby clicking Through All .Click Change Depth Direction

to make the cut upward.

6. Click Complete Feature and Done/Return from the menumanager to complete the rep.

7. Double-click Master Rep.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 39

Page 206: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 3: Create a surfaces simplified rep in ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT.

1. In the View Manager dialog box, click New.2. Type surfs as the new rep name and press ENTER.3. In the menu manager, click Surfaces.4. Press CTRL and in the graphics window, select the five model

surfaces shown.

5. Click Complete Feature and Done/Return from the menumanager to complete the rep.

6. Double-click Master Rep.

Task 4: Substitute the No_Fins_Ribs simplified part rep into the assembly.

1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar and double-clickENGINE.ASM.

2. In the graphics area, select ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, right-click, andclick Set Representation to > User Defined.

3. In the Select Rep dialog box, select NO_FINS_RIBS and click Apply.

4. Start the View Manager .5. In the view manager, select

Master Rep(+) from the list ofsimplified reps, right-click, andselect Save.

6. In the Save Display Elementsdialog box, edit the SimplifiedRep field to block_no_fins_ribsand click OK.

7. Double-click Master Rep.

Module 7 | Page 40 © 2012 PTC

Page 207: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 5: Substitute the cutaway simplified part rep into the assembly.

1. In the graphics area, select ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, right-click, andclick Set Representation To > User Defined.

2. In the Select Rep dialog box, select CUTAWAY and click Apply.

3. In the view manager, selectMaster Rep(+) from the list ofsimplified reps, right-click, andselect Save.

4. In the Save Display Elementsdialog box, edit the SimplifiedRep field to block_cutaway andclick OK.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 41

Page 208: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Opening Simplified RepsOpen simplified reps directly in the Open dialog box.

Opening a simplified rep directly enables you to do the following:

• Open large assemblies without first bringing everything into session.• Save time by opening only the components you want to open (thosepredefined in the simplified rep).

• Define a new simplified rep prior to opening an assembly.• Preview the simplified rep before you open it.• Read the simplified rep's description in a tool tip.

Figure 1 – Open Rep with Preview

Opening Simplified RepsTypically, you activate simplified reps when you first open the full master repof an assembly. You can avoid bringing the entire assembly into session byopening a simplified rep directly in the Open dialog box.

To open a simplified rep, click the Open Rep button at the bottom of theOpen dialog box.

PreviewIn the Open Rep dialog box, click Preview Simplified Rep to expand thepreview pane and view a simplified rep before opening it.

When you cursor over the name of a simplified rep in the Open Rep dialogbox, you can read that rep's description in a tool tip.

Define a Simplified RepClick the Define button in the Open Rep dialog box to create a new simplifiedrep prior to opening an assembly into session.

Module 7 | Page 42 © 2012 PTC

Page 209: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Open an External Simplified RepClick the External Rep button in the Open Rep dialog box to open an Externalsimplified rep that is related to the model.

Auto Evaluate Model RulesYou have the option to evaluate rules when retrieving a simplifiedrepresentation. When opening a simplified rep that is defined using rules,retrieving the rep as it was last evaluated can make some retrieval timesfaster.

The auto_evaluate_simprep_rules CONFIG.pro option controls thedefault behavior during retrieval and regeneration of rule-based simplifiedrepresentations. The Evaluate Rules check box enables you to overridethe default setting during retrieval.

Other Methods for Opening a Simplified RepThere are two other ways to directly open a simplified rep:

• The open_simplified_rep_by_default configuration option enables youto open an assembly in a selected simplified representation. When thisoption is edited to yes, the Open Rep dialog box prompts you to select asimplified representation whenever an assembly is retrieved. This way, youcan avoid opening large assemblies in their master representations andconserve system resources.

• If you edit the default rep of an assembly, that representation is openedinstead of the master rep every time the assembly is opened.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 43

Page 210: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Opening Simplified Reps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Open NONE

Task 1: Open a graphics rep directly in the Open dialog box.

1. Click Open from the QuickAccess toolbar.

2. In the Open dialog box, selectbut DO NOT open TLA.ASM.

3. After selecting TLA.ASM, clickthe Open drop-down menu andselect Open Representation.

4. In the Open Rep dialog box,select Graphics Rep and clickOK.

5. Disable all Datum Display types.

6. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar andnotice that Graphics Rep isalready selected.

7. Click Close .

8. Click Erase Not Displayed . If necessary, drag the dialog boxwider to see the complete list of objects.

The list of models in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box includesfour assembly files and a graphics rep for each part in theassembly. These reps are the internal lightweight reps that CreoParametric uses to open the graphics rep of the assembly.

9. Click OK to erase the listed models from session.

Task 2: Open a user-defined rep directly in the Open dialog box.

1. Click Open .2. In the Open dialog box, select but DO NOT open TLA.ASM.3. After selecting TLA.ASM, click the Open drop-down menu and select

Open Representation.

Module 7 | Page 44 © 2012 PTC

Page 211: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

4. In the Open Rep dialog box, click Preview Simplified Rep toexpand the preview pane.

5. Select NO_BLOWER_2. Notice that the preview updates.6. Cursor over the custom rep names and notice the description for each

rep opens in a tool tip.7. Click OK to open the rep.

8. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar andnotice that NO_BLOWER_2 isalready selected.

9. Click Close.10. Click File > Manage Session >

Erase Not Displayed. Noticethere are no objects to erase.

Because you open this simplified rep directly in the Open Repdialog box, it opens without bringing excluded components intosession. Since you open the simplified rep in this manner, you donot have to manually remove excluded components from session.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 45

Page 212: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module 7 | Page 46 © 2012 PTC

Page 213: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module8Creating Cross-Sections, Display Styles,Layer States, and Combined Views

Module OverviewIt is important to be able to easily create and reuse various views of yourdesign assembly. The Cross-Section, Display Style, and Combination Viewtools in Creo Parametric enable you to create and manage many views ofyour assemblies.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create planar cross-sections in an assembly.• Create offset cross-sections in an assembly.• Create and use zone cross-sections in an assembly.• Create display styles in an assembly.• Create layer states in an assembly.• Create combination views in an assembly.

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 1

Page 214: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Understanding Assembly Cross-SectionsYou can create planar, offset, and zone cross-sections in anassembly.

Assembly Cross-Sections:

• Planar• Offset• Zone

Figure 1 – Planar Cross-Section

Figure 2 – Offset Cross-Section Figure 3 – Zone

Understanding Assembly Cross-SectionsYou can create a cross-sectional cut through an assembly to view thecontents of the assembly at that section. You can view a cross-section ascross-hatching or a clipped cut in the assembly, or you can reference it tocreate a drawing view.You can separately define and edit the cross-hatching shown in eachintersected component of the assembly.

Creating Assembly Cross-SectionsYou create cross-sections using the Section dashboard. You can access theSection dashboard from either the Section types drop-down menu in theModel Display group of the View ribbon tab, or from the Sections tab of theview manager. Several types of cross-sections are available:• Planar – A planar cross-section is defined by a datum plane, coordinatesystem, or planar surface intersecting the model.

• X Direction – An X Direction cross-section is defined as a planarcross-section referencing the X-axis of the default coordinate system.

• Y Direction – A Y Direction cross-section is defined as a planarcross-section referencing the Y-axis of the default coordinate system.

• Z Direction – A Z Direction cross-section is defined as a planarcross-section referencing the Z-axis of the default coordinate system.

• Offset – An offset cross-section uses a sketched cut line to intersect theassembly. The cut line shape is then extruded in one or both directionsfrom the sketch plane.

Module 8 | Page 2 © 2012 PTC

Page 215: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Zone – A zone cross-section defines a region within an assembly that canbe used to select a number of intersecting components.

Component IntersectionUsing the Models tab in the Section dashboard, you can define how thesection intersects the assembly’s components. Available options are:

• Section Assembly – You can select the entire assembly for intersection.• Section Part – You can select a single part in the assembly forintersection.

• Include all models – Section all components intersected by thecross-section.

• Include selected models – Section only the selected components that areintersected by the cross-section.

• Exclude selected models – Section all components intersected by thecross-section, except those selected.

• Include Quilts – Toggle the inclusion of quilts on and off.

Cross-Section Display OptionsYou can configure several different cross-section display options in the viewmanager, including:

• Activate – Specifies the active cross-section, with the default selectionbeing No Cross-Section. When a cross-section is specified as active, themodel geometry is clipped at that cross-section.

• Flip the Clipping Direction – Flips the geometry side that is clipped aboutthe active section.

• Show Section – Toggles the cross-hatching display on or off.• Show Region Boundary – Displays the boundary of the zone.• Zone References – Displays the references of the selected zone.• Zone Components – Highlights the components of the selected zone.• Zone Only – Displays only the components of the selected zone on themodel.

Editing Cross-SectionsThere are numerous editing operations that you can perform oncross-sections, including the following:

• Edit Hatching – Enables you to edit existing hatch patterns or create newpatterns.

• Delete – Enables you to delete a cross-section from a model.• Rename – Enables you to rename the cross-section name.• Copy – Enables you to copy the selected cross-section to a newcross-section.

• Copy from File – Enables you to copy a cross-section from another modeland specify a new reference.

• Description – Enables you to add a text description to a cross-section.

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 3

Page 216: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Assembly Cross-SectionsYou can create planar cross-sections in an assembly.• Available types:– Planar– X Direction– Y Direction– Z Direction

• Cross-section options• Model selection• Edit cross-section hatching• Display management

Figure 1 – Creating a Cross-Sectionin an Assembly Model

Figure 2 – Viewing a Cross-Sectionin the 2D Section Viewer Figure 3 – Patterning a Cross-Section

Creating Assembly Cross-SectionsYou can create new planar cross-sections in an assembly model. Thefollowing planar cross-section types are available:• Planar – Enables you to select a planar surface or datum plane throughwhich to create a cross-section.

• X Direction – Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing alongthe assembly’s default coordinate system X-axis.

• Y Direction – Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing alongthe assembly’s default coordinate system Y-axis.

• Z Direction – Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing alongthe assembly’s default coordinate system Z-axis.

These cross-section types are created using the Section dashboard. You canaccess the Section dashboard from either the Section types drop-down menuin the Model Display group of the View ribbon tab, or from the Sections tabof the view manager.

Module 8 | Page 4 © 2012 PTC

Page 217: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

New cross-sections are given the default names of XSEC0001, XSEC0002,and so on. You can always rename a cross-section either during or aftercreation, similar to any feature. You can also redefine cross-sections ormanage their display using either the Sections node in the model tree or theSections tab in the view manager.

Cross-Section OptionsThe following cross-section creation options are available in the Sectiondashboard:

• Distance from plane – Enables you to type a distance to offset thecross-section from the specified reference. You can also dynamically dragthe cross-section in the graphics window.

• Direction from plane – Enables you to toggle the direction in which thecross-section is offset from the specified reference.

• Cap section – Enables you to cap the surface of the cross-section.• Fill surface color – Enables you to fill the capped surface with a specifiedcolor. This option is only available if the cross-section is capped.

• Enable hatching – Enables you to toggle the cross-section’s hatch patternon or off. The system automatically varies the hatching of the variouscomponents in the assembly.

• 3D Dragger – You can enable the 3D Dragger and use it to translate orrotate the cross-section about the three axes. This is similar to the 3DDragger in Assembly mode.

• View 2-D section in separate window – Enables you to display the 2-Dcross-section in a separate window. Components display in model colorin this dialog box. Interference between components displays in red bydefault, although you can change this interference color in the Options tabin the Section dashboard.

Editing Cross-Section HatchingIf the hatch pattern is enabled for a given cross-section, you can edit thehatching either from the Sections node in the model tree or from the viewmanager. When you edit the hatch pattern, the Edit Hatching dialog boxdisplays with the following options:

• Pattern – Enables you to edit the hatch pattern used. You can selectfrom a default library of ANSI or ISO hatch patterns, or choose from auser-defined library hatch pattern. You must first select the component forwhich the hatch pattern is to be edited.

• Angle – Enables you to specify the angle of the hatch pattern.• Scale – Enables you to size the pattern. You can type a value, or use thetwo options to either halve or double the existing hatch spacing.

• Color – Enables you to modify the color that the hatch pattern displays inthe graphics window.

Model SelectionWhen creating a cross-section in an assembly model, you can specify whichmodels in the assembly are sectioned. The following options are available:

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 5

Page 218: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Include all models – All models in the assembly are sectioned. This isthe default option.

• Include selected models – Enables you to specify only the models to besectioned in the assembly.

• Exclude selected models – Enables you to specify the models that arenot to be sectioned in the assembly.

Cross-Section Display ManagementYou can manage the display of a given cross-section from the Sections nodein the model tree, from the view manager, or by selecting the cross-section inthe graphics window. The following right-click options are available:

• Show Section – Enables you to enable or disable the cross-section withinthe graphics window. This option enables or disables both the sectionitself and the hatch pattern.

• Activate/Deactivate – Activates or deactivates cut on the geometry basedon the cross-section.

Module 8 | Page 6 © 2012 PTC

Page 219: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Assembly Cross-Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

View\Cross-Section_Assembly-Planar SECTIONS.ASM

Task 1: Create default X, Y, and Z cross-sections

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the ribbon, select the View

tab.

3. Select X Direction from theSection types drop-down menu.

4. In the dashboard, click HatchPattern .

5. Click Complete Feature .6. Notice that the hatch pattern

for the BODY.PRT is not easilydistinguishable.

7. In the model tree, locatecross-section XSEC0001.

8. Right-click and select EditHatching.• Select BODY.PRT.• Edit the Angle to 15 and pressENTER.

• Click Halve Hatch Sizetwo times.

• Click Apply and close the EditHatching dialog box.

9. In the model tree, right-clickXSEC0001 and selectDeactivate.

10. Right-click and select ShowSection to toggle it off.

11. Click in the background of thegraphics window to de-select allgeometry.

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 7

Page 220: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

12. Select Y Direction from theSection types drop-down menu.

13. In the dashboard, click FlipClipping Direction .

14. In the dashboard, click 2D View.

15. In the 2D Section Viewer dialogbox, click Rotate Right ifnecessary.

16. Notice the interferencehighlighted in red.

17. Click Complete Feature .18. Right-click and select

Deactivate.

19. Select Z Direction from theSection types drop-down menu.

20. Edit the offset value to 28.21. In the dashboard, select the

Models tab.• Select Exclude selectedmodels.

• Select PLATE.PRT.22. In the dashboard, click Fill

Surface and select thedarkest red color.

23. Click Complete Feature .24. Right-click and select

Deactivate.

Module 8 | Page 8 © 2012 PTC

Page 221: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Create and pattern a cross-section based on a selected plane.

1. Select Planar from the Section types drop-down menu.

2. Click Find from the Status bar.3. In the Search Tool dialog box, select ARM.PRT from the Look in

drop-down list.• Click Find Now.• Select Z-AXIS and click Add Item .• Click Close.

4. Edit the offset to 0 and pressENTER.

5. In the dashboard, click HatchPattern .• Click 2D View .

6. Zoom in on the keyway detail.7. Click Complete Feature .8. Right-click and select

Deactivate.

9. With the section still selected,right-click and select Pattern.

10. Select the top surface ofARM.PRT.

11. In the dashboard, click Flip FirstDirection .• Edit the quantity to 5.• Edit the spacing to 22.

12. Click Complete Feature .

13. In the model tree, expand thePattern 2 of XSEC0004 feature.• Select XSEC0004, pressCTRL, and select theremaining four patternedsections.

• Right-click and select ShowSection.

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 9

Page 222: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 3: Investigate cross-sections from the view manager.

1. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar.

2. In the view manager, select theSections tab.• Click New and view theavailable options.

• Right-click XSEC0001 andnotice the available options.

• Click Close.

This completes the procedure.

Module 8 | Page 10 © 2012 PTC

Page 223: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Offset Assembly Cross-SectionsOffset cross-sections enable you to sketch the shape of thecross-section intersecting your assembly.

Offset Cross-Section Options:

• Define cut line sketch.• Section direction.• Models to intersect.• Hatching display.• Interference display.

Figure 1 – Offset Cross-Section

Figure 2 – Adjustable Hatching Figure 3 – Cut Line Sketch

Creating Offset Assembly Cross-SectionsAn offset cross-section uses a sketched cut line to intersect the assembly.You define the cut line shape in Sketcher and then extrude it in one or bothdirections from the sketch plane. You can only sketch the cut line for an offsetcross-section using straight lines. If you want the cross-section to be viewedin a clipped display, the sketch must be an open sketch.

Creating an Offset Cross-SectionTo create an offset cross-section, click New > Offset from the Sections tab ofthe view manager, type a name, and press ENTER.

The Section dashboard opens, and has the following options:

• Flip Clipping Direction – Changes the side of the sketch on whichthe section is created.

• Extend Section First Side – Extends the cross-section to the first sideof the sketch plane, or enables you to select None.

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 11

Page 224: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Extend Section Second Side – Extends the cross-section to thesecond side of the sketch plane, or enables you to select None.

• Cap Section – Displays surfaces over openings in the sectioned solidgeometry.

• Fill Surface – Enables you to select a color from the palette for thesurface of the cross-section. By default, the colors from the individualcomponents are used.

• Hatch Pattern – Toggles the display of cross-hatching on and off.The Models tab has several options available for determining which modelsare intersected by the section:

• Include all models – Sections all components intersected by thecross-section.

• Include selected models – Sections only the selected components thatare intersected by the cross-section.

• Exclude selected models – Sections all components intersected by thecross-section, except those selected.

The Options tab allows you to toggle the display of interference and to changethe display color of any interference.

Module 8 | Page 12 © 2012 PTC

Page 225: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Offset Assembly Cross-Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

View\Cross-Section_Assembly-Offset OFFSET_XSEC.ASM

Task 1: Create an offset section through the assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters....3. In the Display section, select the Features check box.4. Click OK.

5. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.6. Select the Sections tab in the view manager.7. Click New > Offset, type b, and press ENTER.8. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.

9. Select ASM_FRONT as thesketch plane.

10. Click Flip to change the sketchview orientation, then select Topfrom the Orientation drop-downlist.

11. Select ASM_TOP as theorientation reference and clickSketch.

12. Click Project from theSketching group. Select Loopfrom the Type dialog box.

13. Select the datum curve namedSECT_B-B, as shown in theimage.

14. Click OK on the Sketch tab.

15. Click Hatch Pattern from thedashboard.

16. Click Complete Feature .

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 13

Page 226: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Edit the hatching of the cross-section.

1. In the view manager, right-clickB and select Edit Hatching.

2. Expand DRILL_CHUCK.ASMin the model tree and selectCHUCK.PRT.

3. Select Use hatch from the partin the Edit Hatching dialog box.

4. Edit the Angle to 30.

5. Click Halve Hatch Size .6. Click Apply.7. Click Close in the view manager.

This completes the procedure.

Module 8 | Page 14 © 2012 PTC

Page 227: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Zone Assembly Cross-SectionsCreate a zone to organize your large assembly.

Zone Definition Methods:

• Half-Space• Inside-Outside• Radial Distance From• Offset CSYS

Figure 1 – Half-Space Orientation

Figure 2 – Activated Zone Figure 3 – Zone Region Boundary

Creating Zone Assembly Cross-SectionsZones are 3-D cross-sections that define a region in the assembly. Zonesare used to identify, select, and manage components within the assembly.Components are identified and selected based on their position inside oroutside of the defined region of the zone.You can use zones for the following:• Organize an assembly.• Control view clipping.• Select components using the Find tool.• Define envelope parts.To create a zone, click New on the Xsec tab of the view manager. Type aname, press ENTER, and select Zone from the XSEC OPTS menu.In the Zone dialog box, you can use any combination of the following zonedefinition methods:• Half-Space – The negative or positive side of a selected planar reference.• Inside-Outside – Inside or outside of a selected closed quilt.• Radial Distance From – A radial distance from a selected entity.• Offset CSYS – Inside or outside of a bounding box created by offsetdistances from a selected coordinate system.

You can select more than one reference to define an assembly zone.When you select a reference in the references area of the dialog box, it is

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 15

Page 228: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

highlighted in the Graphics window. Two or more references always havelogical AND and OR capabilities.

Best PracticesEveryone's design environment is different; however, you typically only usethe Zone tool for managing very large assemblies. You may not see a benefitusing it with small to medium sized assemblies.

Module 8 | Page 16 © 2012 PTC

Page 229: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Zone Assembly Cross-Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

View\Cross-Section_Assembly-Zone ZONES.ASM

Task 1: Create a half-space zone to define a selection of components.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar.

3. Select the Sections tab in theview manager, if necessary.

4. Click New > Zone, type zone1,and press ENTER.

5. Select the front circular face ofthe GEARBOX_FRONT.PRT.

Notice the arrows pointing away from the selected surface, towardsthe models to be included in the zone.

6. In the Zone1 dialog box, click Display > Mark Tree.Notice that this adds a column to the model tree, identifying thecomponents intersected by the zone.

7. Click Change Orientation to edit the direction of the zone.8. Click Display > Mark Tree again.

In the model tree, notice that the components identified to be includedin the zone have changed.

9. Click Accept Settings tocomplete the zone creation.

10. Double-click Zone1 to activate it.11. Double-click No Cross Section

to activate it.12. Right-click Zone1 and select

Show Region Boundary.

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 17

Page 230: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

13. Observe the componentsintersected by the zone.• From the In Graphics toolbar,

click the Named Viewsdrop-down list and selectRight.

• Click Named Views andselect Top.

• Select Default Orientationfrom the Named Views .

Task 2: Use the zone to select components to include in a new simplifiedrep.

1. Right-click Zone1 and de-select Show Region Boundary.2. In the view manager, select the Simp Rep tab and click New.3. Type from_zone1 and press ENTER.

4. In the Edit:FROM_ZONE1 component chooser, click Select >Advanced Search.

5. In the Search Tool:1 dialog box, do the following:• Select the Geometry tab.• Ensure that Zone is the selected rule.• Ensure that Inside the zone is selected from the Comparisondrop-down list.

• Ensure that ZONE1 (ZONES.ASM) is selected from the Valuedrop-down list.

• Click Find Now.• Press CTRL+A to select all the items in the found column.• Click Add Column and click Close.

6. In the Edit:FROM_ZONE1component chooser, right-clickthe selected components andclick Set Representation to >Master.

7. Click OK to complete thesimplified rep.

8. Click Close from the viewmanager.

Module 8 | Page 18 © 2012 PTC

Page 231: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

The simplified rep includes all components that are a part ofthe zone.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 19

Page 232: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Display StylesUse display styles to assign display settings to individualcomponents of an assembly.

Display Styles:

• Wireframe• Hidden Line• No Hidden• Shaded• Transparent• Blank

Figure 1 – Display Styles

Creating Display StylesThe display of models in a Creo Parametric session are controlled by the fourfollowing display options: Wireframe, Hidden Line, No Hidden, and Shaded.You can also assign display styles to individual components in an assemblythat can be used regardless of those overall session settings.Use the Style tab in the view manager to create display styles for yourassembly.You can assign one of the following display styles to components in anassembly:• Wireframe – Shows front and back lines equally.• Hidden Line – Shows hidden lines in ghost tones.• No Hidden – Does not show lines behind forward surfaces.• Shaded – Shows the model as a shaded solid.• Transparent – Shows the model as a transparent solid.• Blank – Does not show the model.You can also modify component display styles without using the viewmanager. You can select desired models in the Graphics window, model tree,or search tool and click View > Display Style to assign a display style to theselected models. You can store these temporary edits with a new displaystyle or update them to an existing one.After you define the default style, it appears each time the model is opened.

Uses of Display StylesYou use display styles to do the following:• Increase system performance by either blanking components from displayor limiting the number of components being calculated for hidden linedisplay.

Module 8 | Page 20 © 2012 PTC

Page 233: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Create and save display settings used in presentations or other commonsituations where it is helpful to change the display of components withinan assembly.

You cannot use display styles in drawing view.Blanked components are not removed from session memory; theyare only removed from display. For this reason, you cannot usedisplay styles to reduce the amount of memory required to openand work with an assembly. You reduce the required memory usingsimplified reps.

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 21

Page 234: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Display Styles

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

View\Display-Style_View-Manager GEARBOX_S2.ASM

Task 1: Create a new display style using the view manager.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click View Manager from the Manage Views drop-down menu inthe Model Display group.

3. Select the Style tab in the view manager.4. Click New.

5. Press ENTER to accept thedefault name Style0001. Thisopens the EDIT: STYLE0001dialog box on the Blank tab.

6. In the model tree, selectGEARBOX_REAR_S2.PRT.

7. Click Update View .

8. In the model tree, select the fourBOLT_5-18.PRT models.Notice that the Blank componentstatus is shown in the Editcolumn of the model tree.

9. Click Update View .

10. In the EDIT: STYLE0001 dialogbox, select the Show tab andclick Transparent.

11. In the model tree, expandDRILL_CHUCK_S2.ASM andthen select CHUCK_S2.PRT andGEARBOX_FRONT_S2.PRT.

12. Click Update View .

13. Click Accept Changes .

Module 8 | Page 22 © 2012 PTC

Page 235: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Copy and redefine to create a new display style.

1. With Style0001 still active, click Edit > Copy in the view manager.2. Click OK to create a new display style named Style0002.3. Double-click Style0002 to activate it.4. Click Edit > Redefine from the view manager.

5. In the model tree, selectCHUCK_S2.PRT andPRIME_GEAR_S2.PRT toalso be blanked.

6. Click Update View .

7. Select Hidden Line from theModel Display type drop-downmenu.

8. Click Accept Changes .

Task 3: Use the model tree to edit a display style.

1. With Style0002 still active, click Edit > Copy in the view manager.2. Click OK to create a new display style named Style0003.3. Double-click display style Style0003 to activate it.

4. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading from the ModelDisplay types drop-down menu.

5. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Columns.

6. In the Model Tree Columnsdialog box, select DisplayStyles from the Type drop-downlist.

7. In the Display Style list, selectSTYLE0003 and click AddColumn to add the columnto the model tree.

8. Click OK to close the dialog box.

9. In the STYLE0003 column ofthe model tree, click to the rightof GEARBOX_FRONT_S2.PRTand select Blank from thedrop-down list.

10. To the right of PRIME_GEAR_S2.PRT, select Undo from thedrop-down list.

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 23

Page 236: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

11. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Columns.12. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, click Remove Column

and OK to close the dialog box.

Using the model tree to edit display styles does not provide you withthe option to preview or reset any edits that you make.

This completes the procedure.

Module 8 | Page 24 © 2012 PTC

Page 237: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Layer States in an AssemblyUse layer states to efficiently save and recall combinations oflayer statuses in an assembly.

Layer States:

• Save current layer statuses• Recall defined layer statusesManage display of layers for:

• Annotations• Datum Features• Construction Geometry

Figure 1 – Layers Tab of theView Manager

Creating Layer States in an AssemblyLayer states are created on the Layers tab of the view manager. Layer statesenable you to save and recall a set of defined layer statuses in a model. Youcan create multiple states to capture different combinations of layer statusesand quickly toggle between each state as needed.

To create a layer state, you first set the status of layers as you want to savethem. For example, you may want to hide all layers containing datum featuresand then save that status. In the Layers tab of the view manager, click Newto create a layer state that saves the current layer statuses.

If a layer state is active and the display of layers is edited, the active layerstate is marked with a plus sign (+), indicating that it is modified. You cando the following:

• Double-click the layer state to reset the model's layers as defined by theunmodified layer state.

• Right-click the layer state and select Set Active to reset the model's layersas defined by the unmodified layer state.

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 25

Page 238: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Right-click the layer state and select Save to save the modified layer stateusing the model's current layers statuses.

The hiding an item action places that item on the Hidden Itemslayer. Therefore, the statuses of hidden items are also saved in alayer state.

Best PracticesIt is a best practice to use simplified reps, instead of layers, to excludecomponents from display in an assembly. Layer states are best used tomanage the display of the following:• Annotations – The display of annotations can be controlled using layerstates in combination with combination views to document a model.

• Datum Features – Datum planes, axes, points, and coordinate systems.• Construction Geometry – Surfaces, curves, and other features used tocreate complex model geometry.

Module 8 | Page 26 © 2012 PTC

Page 239: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Layer States in an Assembly

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

View\Layer-States_Assembly LAYERS.ASM

Task 1: Create a layer state to hide the assembly's datum features andreference geometry.

1. Enable only the following DatumDisplay types: .

2. In the ribbon, select the Viewtab. Click Layers from theVisibility group.

3. In the layer tree, select01_ALL_DTM_PLN.Press SHIFT and select06__PRT_ALL_SURFS.Right-click and select Hide.

4. Start the View Managerfrom the Model Display group.On the Layers tab, select New.

5. Type datum_refs_hide andpress ENTER.

6. Click Close from the viewmanager.

Task 2: Create a layer state to hide the assembly's datum features butnot surfaces and curves.

1. In the layer tree, select03_ALL_CURVES. Right-clickand select Unhide.

2. Select 03___PRT_ALL_CURVES. Right-click and selectUnhide.

3. Select 06_ALL_SURFS.Right-click and select Unhide.

4. Select 06___PRT_ALL_SURFS.Right-click and select Unhide.

5. Start the View Managerfrom the Model Display group.On the Layers tab, select New.

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 27

Page 240: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

6. Click No in the Modified StateSave dialog box.

You click No because youdo not want to modifyDATUM_REFS_HIDE.

7. Type curves_surfs_unhide andpress ENTER.

8. Click Close from the viewmanager.

9. Click in the graphics area. Spin,pan, and zoom the model to seethat curves and surfaces are nowunhidden.

10. Click Named Views from the In Graphics toolbar and selectStandard Orientation.

11. In the layer tree, right-click and select Reset Status.

12. Click in the graphics area. Click Repaint from the In Graphicstoolbar to update the display.

13. Start the View Manager from the Model Display group. On theLayers tab, double-click Datum_Refs_Hide.

The layer display statuses change in the layer tree as you editlayer states.

14. Double-click Curves_Surfs_Unhide.15. Double-click Datum_Refs_Hide.16. Click Close.

This completes the procedure.

Module 8 | Page 28 © 2012 PTC

Page 241: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Combination ViewsCombine and save simplified reps, style states, cross-sections,orientations, and exploded views as combination views.

Combine the following:

• Simplified Reps• Display Styles• Cross-Sections• Orientations• Exploded Views• Layer States

Figure 1 – Simplified Repsand Styles

Figure 2 – Cross-Section withDisplay Styles

Figure 3 – Exploded View withDisplay Styles

Creating Combination ViewsA combination view enables you to combine and apply multiple viewmanager states. You can save combination views to quickly switch betweencustomized combination views.

You can create and activate combination views on the All tab of the viewmanager. The following display states can be combined and saved withina combination view:

• Simplified Reps• Display Styles• Cross-Sections• Orientations• Exploded Views• Layer States

Tabbed Display of Combination ViewsWhen you select Display combined views on the All tab of the view manager,each combination view displays in a tabbed window at the bottom of the mainCreo Parametric graphics area. You can select each tab to quickly navigatefrom one combination view to another.

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 29

Page 242: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

You can hide a tab by de-selecting the Tab Display check box next to a viewname in the All tab or by selecting Hide from the shortcut menu. Additionalshortcut menus enable you to configure and edit the tabbed display as follows:

• Redefine – Open the combination view dialog box (the name of the dialogbox changes depending on the view name) to edit the view's definition.

• Remove – Delete the selected combination view and display tab.• Rename – Rename the combination view and display tab.• Description – Type or edit the description of the selected combination view.• Display Customization – Open the view manager to the All tab and editthe tab display.

• View – Set the size of the tab previews to Small, Medium, or Large.

Uses of Combination ViewsYou typically use combination views to do the following:

• Save the common working configuration. For example, you can use a viewincluding a specific orientation, cross-section, and simplified rep whendesigning a component within an assembly.

• Save combinations used to create images for presentations. For example,you can save a view including specific orientations and styles forreproducible image captures.

Combination views can be placed in drawings for documentation orpresentation purposes.

Originals or CopiesEach time you create a new combination view, the New Presentation Statedialog box opens and presents you with the following choices:

• Reference Originals – This option uses existing orientations, styles,simplified reps, and so on, to create the combination view.

• Create Copies – Be aware that this option creates a copy of every displaystate used in the combination view. It uses the new copies to create thecombination view.Using the Create Copies option creates new orientations, styles, simplifiedreps, and so on, in your model.

Best PracticesCombination views are a useful tool for accessing the specific combination ofdisplay views that you use repeatedly to design or display your product.

Module 8 | Page 30 © 2012 PTC

Page 243: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Combination Views

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

View\Combination COMBO.ASM

Task 1: Create a new combination view.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar. Select the Alltab and click New.

3. Press ENTER to accept the default name Comb0001.4. Click Reference Originals in the New Presentation State dialog box.5. In the view manager, click Edit > Redefine to open the COMB0001

dialog box.

6. Select 3D_Side from theOrientation drop-down list.

7. Select Datum_Refs_Hide fromthe Layers drop-down list.

8. Click Update Screen .

9. Select Cut_Away from theSimplified Rep drop-down list.

10. Click Update Screen .

11. Select Trans_Rear from theStyle drop-down list.

12. Click Update Screen .

13. Select the show explodedcheck box.

14. Click Update Screen .

15. Clear the show exploded checkbox.

16. Click Accept Settings .

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 31

Page 244: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Save selected states and views to a combination view.

1. In the viewmanager, double-clickthe combination view namedDefault All.

2. On the Simp Rep tab,double-click Rear_Box.

3. Click Refit from the InGraphics toolbar.

4. On the Style tab, double-clickWire_Gears.

5. On the Sections tab, double-clickA.

6. On the Orient tab, double-click3D_Front.

7. Click Refit from the InGraphics toolbar.

8. Right-click the 3D_Front(+)modified view and select Save....

9. Click OK in the Save DisplayElements dialog box.

10. On the All tab, click New.11. Press ENTER to accept the default name Comb0002.12. Click Reference Originals in the New Presentation State dialog box.13. On the All tab of the view manager, select the Display combined

views check box. This adds a tabbed display of the combinationviews at the bottom of the main graphics window.

14. Click Close from the viewmanager.

15. Select each combination viewtab at the bottom of your graphicswindow. Also notice the previewas you cursor over each tab.

Module 8 | Page 32 © 2012 PTC

Page 245: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

16. Right-click the Comb0002 tab and select Hide.

17. Click View Manager . On the All tab, notice the Tab Displaycheck box has been cleared.

If you select Hide, only the tab for that view is hidden. If youselect Remove, the view is deleted.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 33

Page 246: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module 8 | Page 34 © 2012 PTC

Page 247: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module9Substituting Components using UserDefined, Envelopes, and Simplified Reps

Module OverviewIn Creo Parametric, you can substitute large complicated components withsimplified reps, envelopes, or models related by family tables or interchangeassemblies. These tools enable you to control and manage the systemresources required to work with large assemblies.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create envelope models using a variety of methods.• Substitute models using By Envelope.• Substitute models using User Defined.• Substitute models using By Model.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 1

Page 248: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Understanding EnvelopesYou can substitute envelopes for more complex components inorder to reduce memory requirements of an assembly.

Envelope Creation Methods:

• Create Envelope Part• Select Existing AssemblyComponent

• Surface Subset Shrinkwrap• Faceted Solid Shrinkwrap• All Solid Surfaces SubsetShrinkwrap

Figure 1 – Full Assembly

Figure 2 – Envelopes Created using Different Methods

Understanding EnvelopesAn envelope is a part created to represent a predetermined selection ofcomponents in an assembly. The envelope uses simple geometry to reducememory usage and looks similar to the components it represents.

Creating EnvelopesYou create envelopes within an assembly using the envelope manager.Access the envelope manager by clicking View > Envelope Manager or byselecting Envelope as the model type in the Component Create dialog box.The definition of every envelope part begins in the Envelope Definition dialogbox where the following attributes are defined:• Name – You can type the envelope name in either the Component Createdialog box or the Envelope Definition dialog box.

• Components to Substitute – You select parts and sub-assemblies froman assembly to be substituted by the envelope.

• Envelope Geometry – You can use feature creation tools to definegeometry in an already created envelope. For example, you can add anextrusion to refine the definition of a model created using the Faceted SolidShrinkwrap option.

• Envelope Part – Every envelope has a part model associated with it. Clickthe Envelope Part button to open the Envelope Method dialog box whereyou can select from the following four different methods of creation:

Module 9 | Page 2 © 2012 PTC

Page 249: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

– Create Envelope Part – A new part is created and geometry is thenadded using a variety of geometry creation methods.

– Select Existing Assembly Component – This converts a selected partin the assembly to an envelope. Because the part is an envelope, it nolonger displays in the assembly. Use this method if you have created orcopied a part that you want to turn into an envelope.

– Surface Subset Shrinkwrap – You create an envelope part usingthe Surface Subset Shrinkwrap functionality. This method creates anassociative surface representation of the referenced components.

– Faceted Solid Shrinkwrap – An envelope part is created using theFacet Solid Shrinkwrap functionality. This method creates a tessellatedsolid representation of the referenced components. This shrinkwraptype cannot be modified and is not associative with geometry changesin these models.

– All Solid Surfaces Subset Shrinkwrap – You create an envelope partusing the All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap functionality. This methodcreates an associative representation by copying all solid surfacegeometry from the selected subset of components. Using the All SolidSurfaces Shrinkwrap functionality, this model can be left as a surfacemodel, converted to solid, and simplified using the Fill Contours tool.

Always add an _env suffix to an envelope's part file name. Thisenables you to recognize them as envelope parts in your local filestructure or data management tool.

Using EnvelopesAlthough envelopes are stored as part files with a .PRT extension, you canonly use them as envelopes in the assembly in which they were created. Touse an envelope part, you must explicitly include it in a simplified rep bysubstituting it for the components that it represents. You can substitute anenvelope into a simplified rep using one of the following methods:

• Use Envelope – You can right-click an envelope part in the model treeand select Use Envelope. This substitutes the selected envelope into theassembly and marks the active simplified rep as modified.

• Substitute by Envelope – When creating or editing a simplified rep using theComponent Chooser, you can set the status of components the enveloperepresents to Substitute by Envelope. Note that this substitution only worksfor components that the envelope is defined to represent.

• User Defined – You can include an envelope in a simplified rep and thenuse the User Defined status to substitute that simplified rep with higherlevel simplified reps.

Envelope Displays and BOMsEnvelope models are only simplified representations of design models. Forthis reason, envelope parts:

• Do not appear in the Assembly BOM.• Do not appear in assemblies unless they are substituted into a simplifiedrep.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 3

Page 250: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• By default, appear in the model tree of an assembly; however, they areidentified by both the envelope name and part name. You can changemodel tree settings to disable envelope display.

Best PracticesIf you are responsible for a large assembly, it is a good practice to create alightweight simplified rep that can be used by downstream users of yourassembly. Envelopes are a valuable tool for providing those users with thelightweight model, yet also providing them with key geometric and BOMinformation.

Module 9 | Page 4 © 2012 PTC

Page 251: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating and using a Surface Subset ShrinkwrapEnvelopeYou can simplify an assembly using an envelope created usingthe Surface Subset Shrinkwrap method.

Surface Subset Shrinkwrap

• Envelope Part Name• Quality Level• Attributes

Figure 1 – Detailed Assembly Model Figure 2 – Surface Subset Envelope

Creating and Using a Surface Subset Shrinkwrap EnvelopeYou can create an envelope part and its geometry automatically using theSurface Subset Shrinkwrap method. Using this method, a subset of surfacegeometry is copied from the original assembly into the envelope part. Youcan control the level of surface detail copied into the model using thefollowing options:

• Quality Level – You can edit the relative quality of the shrinkwrap featurecreation process to a value between 1 and 10. High quality levels increaseprocessing time, file size, and the level of detail included in the shrinkwrapfeature.

• Attributes – You can select attributes which control the automatic selectionof shrinkwrap geometry. You can select one of the following:– Auto Hole Filling – Fill all holes or cuts that intersect a single surface.– Include Quilts – Select quilts that should always be included in the

Shrinkwrap feature.– Ignore Small Surfaces – Exclude surfaces that are smaller than a

specified percentage of the overall model size.

You can only create envelopes using Shrinkwrap methods when themaster representation is active.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 5

Page 252: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Associative GeometryGeometry that you create using the Surface Subset Shrinkwrap method isassociative to the component geometry that it references. If the referencedcomponents change, geometry in the envelope updates accordingly.

Using Surface Subset Shrinkwrap EnvelopesLike any envelope, you can substitute those you create using the SurfaceSubset Shrinkwrap method into an assembly's simplified rep.

Module 9 | Page 6 © 2012 PTC

Page 253: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating and Using a Surface SubsetShrinkwrap Envelope

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Shrinkwrap-SurfaceECAD_CNTRL2.ASM

Task 1: Create an envelope part using the envelope manager.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters....3. Under the Display field, select the Envelope Components check box.

• Click OK.4. Click the Manage Views drop-down menu from the Model Display

group, and select Envelope Manager .5. Click New... in the Envelope dialog box.

6. In the Envelope Definition component chooser, do the following:• Near the top of the component chooser, edit the envelope nameENVLP001 to swsurf_pcb.

• In the structure tree, select the ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM check box toinclude all its components.

• Click Envelope Part.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 7

Page 254: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Including all components of ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM in theenvelope definition means that the entire assembly can besubstituted by the envelope.

7. In the Envelope Method dialogbox, do the following:• Select the Surface SubsetShrinkwrap radio button.

• Edit the Name toswsurf_pcb_env.

• Edit the Quality Level to 5.• Click OK in the Alert dialogbox, if necessary.

• Ensure that Auto Hole Fillingis selected.

• Click OK.

8. After the part has been generated, click OK in the Envelope Definitioncomponent chooser.Notice that you can now see the envelope in the model tree.

9. In the Envelope dialog box, select the envelope SWSURF_PCB andclick Info.

10. Scroll down in the INFORMATION WINDOW and notice that it listsall components to be substituted by the envelope. Notice that theenvelope is not currently used in any rep.

11. Click Close in the INFORMATION WINDOW and Close in theEnvelope dialog box.

12. Click Close .

Module 9 | Page 8 © 2012 PTC

Page 255: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Use the model tree to substitute the envelope into an assembly.

1. Click Open . Select HOUSING_BTM2.ASM and click Open.

2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters....3. Under the Display field, select the Envelope Components check box.

• Click OK.4. In the model tree, expand ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM. Right-click

SWSURF_PCB <SWSURF_PCB_ENV.PRT> and click SetRepresentation to > Use Envelope.

5. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.6. Select the Simp Rep tab, if necessary.7. In the Simp Rep tab, right-click the modified Master Rep(+) and

select Save....8. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field

to env_pcb and click OK.9. Click Close from the view manager.

10. In the main toolbar, click File > Manage Session > Erase NotDisplayed.

There are many components that you can now erase from thesession memory because they are substituted by the envelopepart.

11. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.

Task 3: Use the Simplified Rep component chooser to substitute the sameenvelope into another assembly.

1. From the Quick Access toolbar, click Open . SelectHOUSING_BTM3.ASM and click Open.

2. Click View Manager . Click New on the Simp Rep tab.3. Type env_pcb in the Name field and press ENTER.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 9

Page 256: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

4. In the Edit:ENV_PCB component chooser, do the following:• Right-click HOUSING_BTM3.ASM and click Set Representationto > Master.

• Expand ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM and select PCB_CNTRL2.PRT.• Scroll to the bottom of the structure tree. Press SHIFT and selectLCC28.PRT.

• Right-click the selected components and click Substitute >Envelope.

• In the Select envelope dialog box, select SWSURF_PCB(ECAD_CNTRL2), and click OK.

• Click OK to complete the simplified rep.

5. Click Close from the viewmanager.

6. Click Display Style > NoHidden from the ModelDisplay group.

7. In the model tree, expandECAD_CNTRL2.ASM.

8. Right-click SWSURF_PCB<SWSURF_PCB_ENV.PRT>and select Open.

Module 9 | Page 10 © 2012 PTC

Page 257: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

The magenta shrinkwrap feature surfaces of the envelope weresubstituted for the assembly.

9. Click Shading .

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 11

Page 258: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating and Using a Faceted ShrinkwrapEnvelopeYou can simplify an assembly using an envelope created usingthe Faceted Shrinkwrap method.

Faceted Solid Shrinkwrap

• Envelope Part Name• Quality Level• Attributes

Figure 1 – Detailed Assembly ModelFigure 2 – Faceted Shrinkwrap

Envelope

Creating and Using a Faceted Shrinkwrap EnvelopeYou can create an envelope part and its geometry automatically using theFaceted Shrinkwrap method. Using this method, you can create a solidfaceted part based on the geometry of referenced components. You cancontrol the level of detail referenced and the quality of tessellation used tocreate faceted geometry using the following options:• Quality Level – You can edit the relative quality of the shrinkwrap featurecreation process to a value between 1 and 10. High quality levels increaseprocessing time, file size, and the level of detail included in the shrinkwrapfeature.

• Attributes – You can select attributes which control the automatic selectionof shrinkwrap geometry:– Auto Hole Filling – Fill all holes or cuts that intersect a single surface.– Include Quilts – Select quilts that should always be included in the

shrinkwrap feature.– Ignore Small Surfaces – Exclude surfaces that are smaller than a

specified percentage of the overall model size.

Non-Associative GeometryGeometry created using the Faceted Shrinkwrap method is not associative tothe component geometry that it references. If the referenced componentschange, geometry in the envelope does not update.

Using Faceted Shrinkwrap EnvelopesLike any envelope, you can substitute those that you create using theFaceted Shrinkwrap method into an assembly's simplified rep.

Module 9 | Page 12 © 2012 PTC

Page 259: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating and Using a Faceted ShrinkwrapEnvelope

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Shrinkwrap-FacetedECAD_OPTIC2.ASM

Task 1: Create an envelope part using the Component Create dialog box.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters....3. Under Display, select the Envelope Components check box.

• Click OK.

4. Click Create from the Component group.5. In the Component Create dialog box, click Envelope. Type

swfac_pcb and click OK.

6. Within the Envelope Definition component chooser, do the following:• In the structure tree, select the ECAD_OPTIC2.ASM check box toinclude all its components.

• Click Envelope Part.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 13

Page 260: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

7. In the Envelope Method dialogbox, do the following:• Select the Faceted SolidShrinkwrap radio button.

• Edit the Name toswfac_pcb_env.

• Edit the Quality Level to 7.• Click OK in the Alert dialogbox, if necessary.

• Ensure that Auto Hole Fillingis selected.

• Click OK.

8. After the part has been generated, click OK from the EnvelopeDefinition component chooser.Notice that you can now see the envelope in the model tree.

9. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

Task 2: Use the model tree to substitute the envelope into an assembly.

1. Click Open . Select HOUSING_FR2.ASM and click Open.

2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters....3. Under Display, select the Envelope Components check box.

• Click OK.4. In the model tree, expand ECAD_OPTIC2.ASM. Right-click

SWFAC_PCB <SWFAC_PCB_ENV.PRT> and click SetRepresentation to > Use Envelope.

5. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.6. On the Simp Rep tab, right-click the modified Master Rep(+) and

select Save....7. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field

to env_pcb and click OK.8. Click Close from the view manager.9. From the main toolbar, click File > Manage Session > Erase Not

Displayed.

There are many components that you can now erase from thesession memory because they were substituted by the envelopepart.

10. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.

Module 9 | Page 14 © 2012 PTC

Page 261: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 3: Use the Simplified Rep component chooser to substitute the sameenvelope into another assembly.

1. Click Open . Select HOUSING_FR3.ASM and click Open.

2. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar. Click New onthe Simp Rep tab.

3. Type env_pcb as the Name and press ENTER.

4. In the Edit:ENV_PCB component chooser, do the following:• Right-click HOUSING_FR3.ASM and click Set Representation to> Master.

• Expand ECAD_OPTIC2.ASM and select PCB_OPTIC2.PRT.• Scroll to the bottom of the structure tree. Press SHIFT and selectLENS_ASSY.PRT.

• Right-click the selected components and click Substitute >Envelope.

• In the Select Envelope dialog box, select SWFAC_PCB(ECAD_OPTIC2) and click OK.

• Click OK to complete the simplified rep.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 15

Page 262: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

5. Click Close from the viewmanager.

6. In the model tree, expandECAD_OPTIC2.ASM.

7. Right-click SWFAC_PCB<SWFAC_PCB_ENV.PRT> andselect Open.

8. From the In Graphics toolbar,select No Hidden from theDisplay Style types drop-downmenu to verify that the facetedenvelope part is solid.

9. Select Shading from theDisplay Style types drop-downmenu.

10. From the main toolbar, click File> Manage Session > Erase notdisplayed.

There are many components that you can now erase from thesession memory because they were substituted by the envelopepart.

11. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

Module 9 | Page 16 © 2012 PTC

Page 263: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating and Using an All Solid SurfacesShrinkwrap EnvelopeYou can simplify an assembly using an envelope created usingthe all solid surfaces shrinkwrap method.

All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap Envelope:

• Envelope Part Name• Shrinkwrap Component Subset• Shrinkwrap Options

Figure 1 – Detailed Assembly ModelFigure 2 – All Solid Shrinkwrap

Envelope

Creating Surface Subset Shrinkwrap EnvelopesYou can create an envelope part and its geometry automatically using theAll Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap method. Using this method, all solid surfacesof a defined component subset are copied into the envelope. The resultingshrinkwrap feature can be simplified and made solid using available options.• Subset – The Subset button in the shrinkwrap dashboard opens theShrinkwrap Comps component chooser. From the component chooser,you can select the components you want included in the creation of theshrinkwrap feature by setting their status to either Ignore or Consider. Thisoption enables you to reduce the number of components included in thecreation of the shrinkwrap feature.

• Options – You can use the Options tab to further control the shrinkwrapfeature as follows:– Fill contours – Use the Fill contours option to select planar surfaces

intersected by holes or pockets that you want filled during the creationof the shrinkwrap feature. This an excellent method for removingunnecessary geometry copied from complex parts.

– Solidify resulting geometry – This option turns closed surface volumescopied from the referenced subset of components into solid geometry.

– Leave as quilt if solidification fails – If the Solidify resulting geometryoption is selected and Creo Parametric cannot create a solid feature,this option determines how Creo Parametric behaves. If selected, the

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 17

Page 264: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

failed geometry remains, but only as surface geometry. If not selected,the shrinkwrap feature fails and no geometry from the failed surfaceremains.

You can only create envelopes using shrinkwrap methods when themaster representation is active.

Associative GeometryGeometry that you create using the All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap method isassociative to the component geometry that it references. If the referencedcomponents change, geometry in the envelope updates accordingly.

Using Surface Subset Shrinkwrap EnvelopesLike any envelope, you can substitute those you create using the All SolidSurfaces Shrinkwrap method into an assembly's simplified rep using theBy Envelope method.

Module 9 | Page 18 © 2012 PTC

Page 265: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating and Using an All Solid SurfacesShrinkwrap EnvelopeClose Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Shrinkwrap_All-Solid

CAMERA1.ASM

Task 1: Create an envelope part using the envelope manager.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the Model Display group, click Manage Views and select Envelope

Manager .3. Click New in the Envelope dialog box.

4. Within the Envelope Definition component chooser, do the following:• Near the top of the component chooser, edit the envelope nameENVLP001 to solid_cam.

• In the structure tree, select the CAMERA1.ASM check box toinclude all its components.

• Click Envelope Part.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 19

Page 266: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Including all components of CAMERA1.ASM in the envelopedefinition means that the entire assembly can be substituted bythe envelope.

5. In the Envelope Method dialogbox, do the following:• Select the All Solid SurfacesSubset Shrinkwrap radiobutton.

• Edit the Name tosolid_cam_env.

• Click OK.

Module 9 | Page 20 © 2012 PTC

Page 267: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

6. If the template part MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT is not already displayedin the Copy From field of the Creation Options dialog box, clickBrowse.... Double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT from the Choosetemplate dialog box.

7. Click OK to close the Creation Options dialog box.8. If necessary, click OK from the Info dialog box.9. In the shrinkwrap dashboard, click the Subset button.10. Within the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser, do the following:

• In the structure tree, right-click CAMERA1.ASM and select Ignore.• Expand the HOUSING_BTM.ASM and HOUSING_FRONT.ASMnodes.

• Click the check boxes next to HOUSING_BTM.PRT,HOUSING_TOP.PRT, and HOUSING_FRONT.PRT two times eachto set their status to Consider.

• Click OK.

11. On the Options tab of theshrinkwrap dashboard, selectSolidify resulting geometry.

12. Right-click in the graphicswindow and select Fill contourssurfaces.

13. Select the surface onHOUSING_FRONT.PRT, asshown.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 21

Page 268: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

14. Spin the model to the positionshown.

15. Press CTRL and select thesurface on the back ofHOUSING_BTM.PRT, asshown.

16. Click Complete Feature .17. Click OK from the Envelope

Definition component chooser.

18. Click Close .

Task 2: Use the model tree to substitute the envelope into an assembly.

1. Click Open . SelectSECURITYCAM1.ASM and clickOpen.

2. In the model tree, click Settings

> Tree Filters....3. Under Display, select the

Envelope Components checkbox.

4. Click OK.5. In the model tree,

expand CAMERA1.ASM.Right-click SOLID_CAM<SOLID_CAM_ENV.PRT>,and select Set Representationto > Use Envelope.

6. Click View Manager from the Model Display group.7. On the Simp Rep tab, right-click the modified Master Rep(+) and

select Save....8. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field

to env_solid_cam and click OK.9. Click Close from the view manager.10. In the main toolbar, click File > Manage Session > Erase Not

Displayed.

There are many components that you can now erase from thesession memory because they were substituted by the envelopepart.

11. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.

Module 9 | Page 22 © 2012 PTC

Page 269: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

12. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No Hidden from the DisplayStyle types drop-down menu to verify that the faceted envelope partis solid.

13. Edit the model Display Style to Shading .

The black curves on the front and back of the envelope partrepresent where surface contours were selected to be filledduring the shrinkwrap feature creation.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 23

Page 270: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating and Using a Create Features EnvelopeYou can simplify an assembly using an envelope defined byfeatures created in the context of an assembly.

Create Features

• Feature control.• Features created in the context ofthe assembly.

Figure 1 – Full Assembly

Figure 2 – Envelope Created usingan Extrude feature Figure 3 – Finished Envelope

Creating and Using a Create Features EnvelopeTo create an envelope using this method, click Create Envelope Part in theEnvelope Method dialog box. Then, click Create features in the CreationOptions dialog box.

With the envelope part activated in the assembly, you can add features to theenvelope part in the same way that you would add them to a standard part.

Using an Envelope Created Using the Copying an Existing MethodLike any envelope, you can substitute those created using the CreateEnvelope Part, Create Features method into an assembly's simplified rep.

Module 9 | Page 24 © 2012 PTC

Page 271: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating and Using a Create FeaturesEnvelope

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Create-FeaturesECAD_CNTRL.ASM

Task 1: Create an envelope part using the envelope manager.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. From the Model Display group, click Manage Views and select

Envelope Manager .3. Click New... in the Envelope dialog box.

4. Within the Envelope Definition component chooser, do the following:• Near the top of the component chooser, edit the envelope nameENVLP001 to pcb1_btm.

• In the structure tree, select the ECAD_CNTRL.ASM check box toinclude all its components.

• Click Envelope Part.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 25

Page 272: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

5. In the Envelope Method dialog box, do the following:• Select the Create Envelope Part radio button.• Edit the Name to pcb1_btm_env and click OK.

6. In the Creation Options dialog box, click Create features and clickOK.

7. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.8. In the graphics window, right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.9. Select the top most surface of the extruded PCB_CNTRL.PRT.10. In the Sketch dialog box, select Top from the Orientation drop-down

list. Click Flip and then click Sketch.11. In the References dialog box, click Close.12. In the Missing References dialog box, click Yes.

13. Click Project from theSketching group.

14. Click Loop in the Type dialogbox.

15. Select the top surface ofPCB_CNTRL.PRT, as shown,and click Accept.This creates sketch entitiesalong the outer edges of the part.

16. Click OK to complete the sketch.

17. Click Named Views andselect Standard Orientationfrom the drop-down list.

18. Press SHIFT and click the smallwhite, square handle. Drag it tothe top surface of TO5.PRT, asshown.

19. Click Complete Feature to complete the extrude feature.20. Click Done from the Envelope toolbar.21. Click OK from the Envelope Definition component chooser.

You can add additional features to the envelope at any time.Open the envelope part PCB1_BTM_ENV.PRT and add features,just as you would in any part model.

22. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

Module 9 | Page 26 © 2012 PTC

Page 273: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Use the model tree to substitute the envelope into an assembly.

1. Click Open . SelectHOUSING_BTM.ASM and clickOpen.

2. In the model tree, click Settings

> Tree Filters....3. Under Display, select the

Envelope Components checkbox.

4. Click OK.5. In the model tree, expand

ECAD_CNTRL.ASM.Right-click PCB1_BTM<PCB1_BTM_ENV.PRT>and select Set Representationto > Use Envelope.

6. In the main window, click View Manager from the Model Displaygroup.

7. On the Simp Rep tab, right-click the modified Master Rep(+) andselect Save....

8. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep fieldto simple_pcb1 and click OK.

9. Click Close in the view manager.10. In the main toolbar, click File > Manage Session > Erase not

displayed.

There are many components that you can now erase fromsession memory because they were substituted by the envelopepart.

11. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 27

Page 274: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating and Using an Envelope Copied from anExisting PartYou can simplify an assembly using an envelope created bycopying an existing part.

Copy From Existing

• Quick and Easy• Non-Associative

Figure 1 – Detailed Assembly ModelFigure 2 – Envelope Copied

From Existing

Creating and Using an Envelope Copied from an Existing PartYou can quickly create an envelope part by copying an existing model. Youcan then define the envelope geometry by editing dimensions and insertingor deleting features that were copied to the envelope part.

To create an envelope using this method, click Create Envelope Part in theEnvelope Method dialog box. Then, click Copy from Existing in the CreationOptions dialog box. You can then browse to select the model you wantto copy.

Non-Associative CopyThe copied envelope part is not associative to the existing model from whichit was copied. A change to the original model does not update the envelopepart.

Using an Envelope Created Using the Copying an Existing MethodLike any envelope, you can substitute those that you create using theCopying an Existing method into an assembly’s simplified rep.

Module 9 | Page 28 © 2012 PTC

Page 275: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating and Using an Envelope Copiedfrom an Existing Part

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Copy ECAD_OPTIC.ASM

Task 1: Create an envelope part using the Component Create dialog box.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click Create from the Component group.3. In the Component Create dialog box, click Envelope. Type pcb2

in the Name field and click OK.

4. Within the Envelope Definition component chooser, do the following:• In the structure tree, click the check box next to ECAD_OPTIC.ASMto include all its components.

• Click Envelope Part.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 29

Page 276: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

5. In the Envelope Method dialog box, click Create Envelope Part. Editthe name to pcb2_env and click OK.

6. In the Creation Options dialog box, click Copy from Existing andthen click Browse....

7. In the Choose template dialog box, select PCB_OPTIC.PRT and clickOpen.

8. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.

9. Click Csys Display to enable the coordinate system display.

10. In both models, select ECAD_DEFAULT as component and assemblyreferences, as shown.

11. Click Complete Component .12. Click OK from the Envelope Definition component chooser.

13. Click Csys Display to disable the coordinate system display.

14. Click Close .

Task 2: Edit the envelope part.

1. Click Open . Then click In Session in the Open dialog box.2. Select PCB2_ENV.PRT and click Open.

This is the envelope part you just created by copying thedesign model PCB_OPTIC.PRT.

3. In the model tree, right-click Protrusion id 39 and select Edit.4. Edit the dimension 1.575 to 6.575 and click twice in the graphics

window to update the geometry.

5. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.

Module 9 | Page 30 © 2012 PTC

Page 277: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

6. In the model tree, select datumplane FRONT as the sketchplane.

7. Sketch and dimension a circle,as shown.

8. Click OK to complete thesketch.

9. Edit the depth to 19.5 and clickComplete Feature .

Task 3: Use the model tree to substitute the envelope into an assembly.

1. Click Open . Select HOUSING_FRONT.ASM and click Open.

2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters....3. Under Display, select the Envelope Components check box.

• Click OK.4. In the model tree, expand ECAD_OPTIC.ASM. Right click PCB2

<PCB2_ENV.PRT> and select Set Representation to > UseEnvelope.

5. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.6. On the Simp Rep tab, right-click the modified Master Rep(+) and

select Save....7. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field

to simple_pcb and click OK.

8. Click Close in the view manager.9. In the main toolbar, click File >

Manage Session > Erase NotDisplayed.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 31

Page 278: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

There are many components that you can now erase from thesession memory because they were substituted by the envelopepart.

10. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

Module 9 | Page 32 © 2012 PTC

Page 279: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Substituting Components using User DefinedYou can substitute a component with any of its custom simplifiedreps using the User Defined option.

Figure 1 – AssemblyFigure 2 – Substituted Simplified

Reps

Substituting Components using User DefinedYou can automatically substitute a component of an assembly with any of thecomponent's custom simplified reps using the User Defined option.

The component chooser opens when you create a new simplified rep orredefine an existing rep in the view manager. In the component chooser, usethe following steps to substitute a component using the User Defined option:

• In the structure tree, right-click the component you want to substitute andclick Set Representation to > User Defined.

• Select the rep you want to use in the Select Rep dialog box and click Apply.

You can also select the Status field next to a component and selectUser Defined from the drop-down list.

From the model tree, use the following steps to substitute a component usingone of its simplified reps:

• In the model tree, right-click the component you want to substitute and clickSet Representation to > User Defined.

• Select the rep you want to use in the Select Rep dialog box and click Apply.

You can only substitute custom simplified reps and the Default Repin a simplified rep. You cannot substitute the standard Symbolic,Geometry, and Graphics reps.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 33

Page 280: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Substituting Components using UserDefined

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Substitute_User-Defined CAMERA1.ASM

Task 1: Create a simplified rep that substitutes sub-assemblies withsimplified reps.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. From the In Graphics toolbar, click View Manager . Click New onthe Simp Rep tab.

3. Type simple_camera as the Name and press ENTER.

4. In the Edit:SIMPLE_CAMERA component chooser, do the following:• Right-click CAMERA1.ASM and click Set Representation to >Master.

• Right-click HOUSING_ BTM.ASM and click Set Representationto > User Defined.

• Select SIMPLE_PCB in the SELECT REP dialog box and clickApply.

• Click OK to complete the simplified rep.

Module 9 | Page 34 © 2012 PTC

Page 281: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Use the model tree to substitute another sub-assembly.

1. In the model tree, right-clickHOUSING_FRONT.ASM andclick Set Representation to >User Defined.

2. In the SELECT REP dialog box,select SIMPLE_PCB1 and clickApply.

A simplified rep containing afaceted solid is substitutedinto the assembly.

3. In the viewmanager, double-clickSimple_Camera(+) to reset themodified simplified rep.

4. In the model tree, right-clickHOUSING_FRONT.ASM andclick Set Representation to >User Defined.

5. In the SELECT REP dialog box,select SIMPLE_PCB2 and clickApply.

6. In the view manager, right-clickSimple_Camera(+) and selectSave....

7. Click OK in the Save DisplayElements dialog box.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 35

Page 282: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

8. Click Close in the view manager.9. In the main toolbar, click File > Manage Session > Erase Not

Displayed.

Many of the components are removed from the session memorywhen you select to substitute simple objects for the two detailedPCB assemblies. This increases system performance.

10. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

Module 9 | Page 36 © 2012 PTC

Page 283: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Substituting by Interchange and Family TableYou can substitute components related by a family table orinterchange assembly in a simplified rep.

Substitute by:

• Interchange• Family Table

Figure 1 – Full Assembly

Figure 2 – Substitute by InterchangeFigure 3 – Substitute by

Family Table

Substituting by Interchange and Family TableYou can substitute components into a simplified rep using the Interchangeand Family Table options. These options enable you to automaticallysubstitute any components related by family table or interchange assembly.

The component chooser opens when you create a new simplified rep orredefine an existing rep in the view manager. In the component chooser, usethe following steps to substitute a component by Interchange or Family Table:

• In the component chooser, right-click the component you want to substitute.Select Substitute and then select either Interchange or Family Table.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 37

Page 284: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• In the Family Tree dialog box, select the interchange component or familytable instance that you want to substitute and click OK.

You can also select the Status field next to a component, and thenselect Substitute by Interchange or Substitute by Family Tablefrom the drop-down list.

Module 9 | Page 38 © 2012 PTC

Page 285: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Substituting by Interchange and FamilyTable

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Substitute_Interchange_Family-TableSECURITYCAM1.ASM

Task 1: Substitute the camera assembly with a simplified part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. From the in Graphics toolbar,

click View Manager . ClickNew on the Simp Rep tab.

3. Type solid_camera as theName and press ENTER.

4. In the Edit:SOLID_CAMERA component chooser, do the following:• Right-click SECURITYCAM1.ASM and select Set Representationto > Master.

• Right-click CAMERA1.ASM and select Substitute > Interchange.• In the Family Tree dialog box, expand CAMERA1_INTCHG.ASM.Select CAMERA_LIGHT.PRT and click OK.

• Click OK to complete the simplified rep.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 39

Page 286: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Verify that the sub-assembly was substituted with the solid part.

1. In the view manager, select theSections tab.

2. Double-click cross-section A.

In this simplified rep,CAMERA1.ASM has beensubstituted by a single solidpart model.

Task 3: Substitute a simplified thumb nut to reduce detail in the rep.

1. Double-click cross-section NoCross Section on the Sectionstab of the view manager.

2. Spin and zoom the model so thatyou can see the slotted geometryof THUMB_NUT_M6X1.PRT.

3. Select the Simp Rep tab,right-click Solid_Camera, andselect Redefine.

Module 9 | Page 40 © 2012 PTC

Page 287: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

4. In the Edit:SOLID_CAMERA component chooser, do the following:• In the structure tree, expand the ARM1.ASM node.• Right-click THUMB_NUT_M6X1.PRT and select Substitute >Family Table.

• In the Family Tree dialog box, select THUMB_NUT_M6X1_SIMPLEand click OK.

• Click OK to complete the simplified rep.

5. Click Close in the view manager.6. Spin and zoom the model

to verify the slottedTHUMB_NUT_M6X1.PRTwas substituted.

7. Click File > Manage Session >Erase Not Displayed.

In the Erase Not Displayed dialog box, notice all the componentsthat you can now erase from the session memory because theywere substituted by the single parts.

8. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 41

Page 288: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module 9 | Page 42 © 2012 PTC

Page 289: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module10Understanding Advanced Simplified RepFunctionality

Module OverviewOnce you have learned the basics of simplified representations, you canutilize advanced functionality to define simplified reps by rules based onmodel size, location or proximity to other components. You can also manageon-demand simplified rep options and create external reps.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Search for components in simplified reps.• Create simplified reps based on model size.• Create simplified reps using zones.• Create simplified reps based on distance.• Create simplified reps using exterior components.• Define simplified reps using rules.• Utilize on-demand simplified reps.• Create external simplified reps.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 1

Page 290: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Searching for Components for Simplified RepsYou can use the Search tool to automate the selection ofcomponents referenced in a simplified rep.

Using the Search Tool

• Attributes• History• Status• Geometry

Figure 1 – Save Rule as Layer

Figure 2 – Search Attributes Figure 3 – Search Geometry

Searching for Components for Simplified RepsWhen creating simplified reps on a large assembly, the selection ofcomponents for a particular rep can often be the most tedious task. You canuse the Search tool to automate this task in the following two ways:

• One time Search – Use the Search tool to select components and excludeor edit their representation.

• Saved Search – A search is saved as a layer with an embedded rule. Oncethe search is saved to a layer containing the search rule, componentsare added/removed automatically from the layer based on the rule. Youcan then select all the components on the layer and exclude or edit theirrepresentation.

You can also build a compound search. Selecting Build Query from theOptions drop-down list enables you to add multiple queries to the search.This enables you to narrow down the search results by combining multiplesearches together with AND/OR operators.

Search CriteriaWith the Search tool, you can search using various criteria, including thefollowing. Note that depending on the search type, you may need to edit thesettings to look for components or solid models accordingly.

• Attributes

Module 10 | Page 2 © 2012 PTC

Page 291: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

– Name – Search for components by name. You can use wildcards suchas asterisk (*) to select multiple similarly named components. Forexample, you can search for BOLT* or *BOLT to locate all componentswith names starting or ending with the text BOLT.

– Type – Search for components by type. For example, you can searchfor an assembly to locate sub-assemblies, or you could search for BulkItems, Parts, or Skeletons.

– Expression – Search for components by matching a parameterexpression. For example, if all components have a parameter formaterial, you can select all components that have ALUM as the valuefor the material parameter.

– Size – Search for solid models by size. The system can locatecomponents based on their absolute or relative physical size.

• History– ID – Search for a component with a particular component ID number.– Number – Search for components with a specified component number

or range.• Status– Regeneration – Search for components that are frozen, child of frozen,

failed, packaged, suppressed, and so on.– Layer – Search for components on a particular name layer.– Display – Search for solid models that are on a particular simplified rep,

style state, or are currently hidden.– Parent/Child – Search for solid models that are parents or children of

a selected component. Options are available to limit the scope andextent of the parent/child relationship.

– Copied Refs – Search for components that have copied references thatare edited to a selected status.

• Geometry– Zone – Search for components or solid models that are inside or outside

a defined zone.– Distance – Search for components or solid models within a distance

from a reference.– Exterior Comps – Search for components or solid models that are on

the exterior of an assembly.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 3

Page 292: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Searching for Components for SimplifiedReps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_SearchDRILL_SEARCH.ASM

Task 1: Search for all bolts in the assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.

3. Click Find from the Investigate group.4. Select Component from the Look for drop-down list.5. On the Attributes tab, ensure that Name is the selected rule.

6. Ensure that the Comparisoncriteria is equal to has beenselected from the drop-down list.

7. In the Value field, type BOLT*.8. Click Find Now. Creo

Parametric finds and lists32 models meeting this criteria.

9. Click in the found items field andcursor over the found items tohighlight them.

Bolts with varying lengths and diameters of 4 mm, 5 mm, and 6 mmhave been found.

Task 2: Build a query to find bolts of specific sizes.

1. In the Search Tool:1 dialog box, click the New Search button.2. Click the Options button and select Build Query, if necessary.3. In the Value field, type BOLT_4* and click Add New.4. In the Value field, type BOLT_6* and click Add New.

An OR operator is placed between the two rules in the query.

Module 10 | Page 4 © 2012 PTC

Page 293: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

5. Click Find Now.6. Select the listed items and click

Add Item .7. Click Close.

14 bolts with 4 mm or 6 mmdiameters are found.

Task 3: Create a simplified rep by excluding components from the query.

1. With the bolts still selected, right-click and select Set Representationto > Exclude.

2. Start the View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.3. Right-click Master Rep(+) and select Save.4. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field

to no_bolt_4_6 and click OK.

Task 4: Save queried components to a layer.

1. Double-click Master Rep toactivate it.

2. Click Find from theInvestigate group.

3. In the Value field, type BOLT_5*and click Find Now.

4. Press CTRL+A to select the 18items found.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 5

Page 294: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

5. In the Search Tool:1 dialog box, click Options > Save Query.6. In the Save Rules dialog box, type no_bolt_5 and click OK.7. Click Close in the Search Tool:1 dialog box and Close from the view

manager.8. In the ribbon, select the View tab.

9. Click Layers from the Visibility group.10. Expand the NO_BOLT_5 layer to see the bolts that have been added

to it by the query.11. Right-click the layer and select Select Items.12. In the graphics area, right-click and select Set Representation to

> Exclude.

13. Start the View Manager .14. Right-click Master Rep(+) and select Save.15. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field

to no_bolt_5 and click OK.16. Double-click Master Rep and click Close.

This completes the procedure.

Module 10 | Page 6 © 2012 PTC

Page 295: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Simplified Reps by SizeYou can use the Search tool to select components to bereferenced in a simplified rep based on size.

Bounding Box Size Type:

• Relative (0-1)• Absolute (value)Comparison:

• Equal to (=) , Not equal to (≠),Greater than (>), Less than (<)

• Greater than or equal to (≥), Lessthan or equal to (≤)

Include All ModelsFigure 1 – Bounding Box

Figure 2 – Relative Size Figure 3 – Absolute Size

Creating Simplified Reps by SizeYou can create a simplified rep by selecting models based on their size.Once you search for and select Solid Models using the Search tool, you canexclude these models or edit their representation. For example, you canselect all components above or below a particular size and then excludethem all at once in a simplified rep.

Model SizeTo determine a model’s size, the system uses the same calculation as theModel Size functionality on the Analysis tab. This analysis places the smallestrectangular bounding box that completely encompasses the model. Note thatall model geometry is considered, whether it is solid or non-solid. The systemthen measures the length of the 3-D diagonal across the bounding box. Thelength of this diagonal, in current model units, is used as the size of the model.

Size TypeWhen searching by size, there are two size types, Relative and Absolute. TheRelative option searches for models using a percentage scale. For example,a relative value of 0.15 can locate all models that are 15% of the overallassembly size. The Absolute option searches for models using a value. Forexample, typing a value of 150 can locate all models that are 150 model units.For each size search, you can specify one of the following comparisons:

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 7

Page 296: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Equal to• Not equal to• Greater than• Less than• Greater than or equal to• Less than or equal toYou can also build a compound size search. For example, if you need toselect all models that are greater than 100 and less than 150, you canperform an initial search for models greater than 100, and then use theBuild Query option to search within the results for models less than 150.Additionally, you can toggle the compound operator to either AND or OR.

Include All ModelsYou can also use the Include All Models option to search withinsub-assemblies.

Module 10 | Page 8 © 2012 PTC

Page 297: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Simplified Reps by Size

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Size DRILL_SIZE.ASM

Task 1: Search for components of a relative size.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.

3. Click Find from the Investigate group.4. Select Solid Model from the Look for drop-down list, if necessary.5. On the Attributes tab, select Size as the rule.6. Ensure that Relative is selected from the Type drop-down list.7. Select is less than from the Comparison drop-down list.8. In the Value field, type 0.15 and ensure that the Include All Models

check box is cleared.

9. Click Find Now. CreoParametric finds and lists53 solid models meeting thiscriteria.

10. Press CTRL+A to highlight allfound items.

The solid models found aremostly bolts and other smallcomponents.

11. Click Add Item and clickClose.

Task 2: Create a simplified rep by excluding the found components.

1. With the found models stillselected, right-click and selectSet Representation to >Exclude.

2. Start the View Managerfrom the In Graphics toolbar.

3. Right-click Master Rep(+) andselect Save.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 9

Page 298: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

4. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep fieldto no_less_15_percent and click OK.

5. In the view manager, double-click Master Rep. Leave the viewmanager open.

Task 3: Create a simplified rep by excluding components from the query.

1. Click Find from the Investigate group.2. If necessary, click Options and activate Build Query. This is not

necessary if the Query Builder field is already open.3. Select is greater than from the Comparison drop-down list.4. Ensure that the Value field is still 0.15 and click Add New.5. Select is less than from the Comparison drop-down list.6. In the Value field, type 0.50 and click Add New.7. Click Find Now. Notice 80 items have been found.8. Click on the or operator and select and.9. Click Find Now. Notice 19 items have now been found.10. Press CTRL+A, click Add Item , and then click Close.

11. Right-click and select SetRepresentation to > Exclude.

12. In the view manager, right-clickMaster Rep(+) and select Save.

13. Edit the Simplified Rep field tono_15–50_percent and clickOK.

14. Double-click Master Rep.

Task 4: Save queried components to a layer.

1. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.

2. Click Model Size from the Investigate group. SelectDRILL_SIZE.ASM from the model tree. Notice the overall size isapproximately 700 mm.

3. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.

Module 10 | Page 10 © 2012 PTC

Page 299: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

4. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.

5. Click Find from the Investigate group.6. Select Absolute from the Type drop-down list.7. Ensure is greater than is selected from the Comparison drop-down

list.8. In the Value field, type 120 and click Find Now.9. Press CTRL+A to select the 21 found items. Click Add Item and

click Close.

10. Right-click, and click SetRepresentation to > Exclude.

11. In the view manager, right-clickMaster Rep(+) and select Save.

12. Edit the Simplified Rep field tono_larger_120 and click OK.

13. Double-click Master Rep andclick Close.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 11

Page 300: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Simplified Reps using ZonesYou can use zones to select components to be referenced in asimplified rep.

Searching by Zone:

• Inside Zones• Outside ZonesZone Types:

• Half-Space• Inside-Outside• Radial Distance• Offset Csys Figure 1 – Offset Csys Zone

Figure 2 – Half-Space Zone Figure 3 – Radial Distance Zone

Creating Simplified Reps using ZonesYou can search for components or solid models inside or outside a definedzone. Once selected, you can exclude them or edit their representation witha simplified rep.When searching for solid models, a component is selected if any solidgeometry is within or is crossing the zone boundary. When searching forcomponents, a component is selected if any solid or non-solid geometry(datum feature, for example) is within or crossing the zone boundary.

Zone TypesZones are created and managed as a type of cross-section within the viewmanager. You can create the following four types of zones:• Half-Space – You define this type of zone by selecting a datum plane orplanar surface as a reference. You can then flip the direction of the zone tobe on either side of the reference. An example of this type of zone is shownin the lower left figure. The zone direction is illustrated by the arrows.

• Inside-Outside – You define this type of zone by selecting an enclosedsurface quilt as a reference. You can then flip the direction of the zone tobe on the inside or outside of the quilt (not shown).

• Radial Distance From – You define this type of zone by selecting a vertexor datum point or coordinate system as a reference. You then specify a

Module 10 | Page 12 © 2012 PTC

Page 301: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

distance value to define a spherical zone. An example of this type of zoneis shown in the lower right figure.

• Offset Csys – You define this type of zone by selecting a coordinate systemas a reference. You then define a rectangular zone by typing positive ornegative (+/-) values for the X, Y, and Z directions. An example of this typeof zone is shown in the upper right figure.

You can also build compound zones by defining multiple zones and thenlinking them with AND/OR statements. For example, you can create a zoneby selecting two parallel planes as half-space references.

You can then define the zone to include all components on the positive sideof the first plane AND all the components on the negative side of the secondplane, thereby selecting all components between the planes.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 13

Page 302: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Simplified Reps using Zones

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Zone DRILL_ZONE.ASM

Task 1: Search for components in a Radial Distance From zone.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters....3. In the Display section, select the Features check box and click OK.

4. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar and select theSections tab.

5. Click New > Zone, type zone1, and press ENTER.

6. Select Radial Distance Fromfrom the drop-down list.

7. Select Point from the Fromdrop-down list. Type 90 as theRadius and press ENTER.

8. Select datum point APNT0 fromthe model.

9. Click Accept Settings andclick Close.

Radial Distance zones cannot display a clipped cut if they are set toactive.

10. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.

11. Click Find from the Investigate group.12. In the Look for drop-down list, select Solid Model, if necessary.13. On the Geometry tab, ensure Zone is the selected rule.14. Ensure that Inside the zone is selected from the Comparison

drop-down list.15. Ensure that Zone1 is selected from the Value drop-down list, and

select the Show Selected Zones check box.16. Click Find Now.17. Press CTRL+A to select the 14 items. Click Add Item and click

Close.18. With the found models still selected, right-click, and click Set

Representation to > Exclude.

Module 10 | Page 14 © 2012 PTC

Page 303: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

19. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar. On theSimp Rep tab, right-click MasterRep(+) and select Save.

20. Edit the Simplified Rep field toexclude_zone1 and click OK.

21. In the view manager, double-click Master Rep and leave the viewmanager open.

Task 2: Search for components in an Offset Csys zone.

1. Select the Sections tab and click New > Zone. Type zone2 andpress ENTER.

2. Select Offset CSYS from thedrop-down list.

3. Select CSYS from the modeltree.

4. Edit the offset values as follows:• X1: –35 Y1: –50 Z1: 55• X2: 35 Y2: 25 Z2: 200

5. With your cursor in the Z2 field,press ENTER.

6. If required, click ChangeOrientation to ensure thatthe zone is labeled as Inside.

7. Click Preview Display .

8. Click Accept Settings andclick Close.

9. Click Find from the Investigate group.10. Select Zone2 from the Value drop-down list and select the Show

Selected Zones check box.11. Click Find Now.12. Press CTRL+A to select the 15 items. Click Add Item and click

Close.13. With the found models still selected, right-click, and select Set

Representation to > Exclude.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 15

Page 304: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

14. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar.

15. Select the Simp Rep tab,right-click Master Rep(+), andselect Save.

16. Edit the Simplified Rep field toexclude_zone2 and click OK.

17. In the viewmanager, double-clickMaster Rep and click Close.

This completes the procedure.

Module 10 | Page 16 © 2012 PTC

Page 305: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Simplified Reps by DistanceYou can select components that are a specified distance from aselected reference to be included in a simplified rep.

Comparison:

• Less than• Greater thanValue

Reference:

• Point/Vtx• Csys• And so on

Figure 2 – Radial Distance

Figure 1 – Search by Distance

Creating Simplified Reps by DistanceYou can create a simplified rep by selecting models based on their distancefrom a reference.

When searching for solid models, a component is selected if any solidgeometry is within or is crossing the distance value.

When searching for components, a component is selected if any solid ornon-solid geometry (datum feature, for example) is within or crossing thedistance value.

Once you search for and select components or solid models using theSearch tool, you can exclude these models or edit their representation. Forexample, you can select all components within a particular radius and thenexclude them all at once in a simplified rep. This type of Search is defined byselecting a vertex or datum point or coordinate system as a reference. Then,you specify a distance value to define a spherical radius.

You can also select all components within or outside of the sphere.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 17

Page 306: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Simplified Reps by Distance

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_DistanceDRILL_DIST.ASM

Task 1: Search for components in a Radial Distance From zone.

1. Enable only the following DatumDisplay types: .

2. In the ribbon, select the Toolstab.

3. Click Find from theInvestigate group.

4. In the Look for drop-down list,select Solid Model, if necessary.

5. On the Geometry tab, selectDistance as the rule.

6. Select Point from the Typedrop-down list.

7. Pre-select the reference datumpoint APNT0 from the model,and then select it.

8. Ensure that is less than isselected from the Comparisondrop-down list.

9. Edit the Value field to 75 andpress ENTER.

10. Click Find Now.11. Press CTRL+A to select the six

items in the list.12. Click Add Item and click

Close.

Module 10 | Page 18 © 2012 PTC

Page 307: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Create a simplified rep by setting the status of found models tomaster.

1. With the found models stillselected, right-click, and selectSet Representation to >Master.

2. Start the View Manager .On the Simp Rep tab, right-clickMaster Rep(+) and select Save.

3. Edit the Simplified Rep field toinclude_dist_handle and clickOK.

4. In the viewmanager, double-clickMaster Rep and click Close.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 19

Page 308: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Simplified Reps using ExteriorComponentsYou can create a simplified rep by selecting models based ontheir location relative to the exterior of an assembly.

Comparison:

• Equal to• Not equal toQuality Level:

• 1–10Figure 1 – Complete Assembly

Figure 2 – Quality Level of 2 Figure 3 – Quality Level of 4

Creating Simplified Reps using Exterior ComponentsYou can create a simplified rep by selecting models based on their assembledlocation relative to the outside (or exterior) of an assembly.

When searching for solid models, only solid geometry is considered in thecalculation. When searching for components, both solid and non-solidgeometry (datum features, for example) are considered in the calculation.

Once you search for and select components or solid models using the Searchtool, you can exclude these models or edit their representation. For example,you can select all components on the exterior of an assembly and thenexclude them all at once in a simplified rep. This type of search is defined byselecting a comparison type and a quality level.

• Comparison – The comparison determines whether the search locates theexterior components and then selects them, or selects components thatare not the exterior components. Using this option effectively enables youto select exterior or interior components.

• Quality Level – There is a 1–10 quality level setting that determines howthoroughly the system searches for exterior components.In the figures, you can see the complete assembly and two representationssimplified by adjusting the quality level. The representation containingthe fewest components was created using a quality level of 4. Therepresentation containing more components illustrates the exteriorcomponents excluded using a quality level of 2.

Module 10 | Page 20 © 2012 PTC

Page 309: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Simplified Reps using ExteriorComponents

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_ExteriorDRILL_EXT.ASM

Task 1: Search for exterior components of the assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.

3. Click Find from the Investigate group.4. From the Look for drop-down list, select Solid Model, if necessary.5. On the Geometry tab, ensure Exterior Comps is the selected rule.6. Ensure that is equal to is selected from the Comparison drop-down

list.7. Select 4 from the Value (Quality Level) drop-down list.

8. Click OK in the Exterior Compsdialog box.

9. Click Find Now.10. Press CTRL+A to select the 45

items in the list.11. Click Add Item and click

Close.

Task 2: Create a simplified rep by excluding the exterior models.

1. With the found models stillselected, right-click and selectSet Representation to >Exclude.

2. Start the View Manager .On the Simp Rep tab, right-clickMaster Rep(+) and select Save.

3. Edit the Simplified Rep field to no_exterior and click OK.4. Double-click Master Rep and click Close.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 21

Page 310: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 3: Search for components not on the exterior of the assembly.

1. Click Find from the Investigate group.2. Ensure that Solid Model is selected from the Look for drop-down list.3. Ensure that Exterior Comps is selected as the rule.

4. Select is not equal to from theComparison drop-down list.

5. With the Quality Level still at 4,click Find Now.

6. Press CTRL+A to select the 25items in the list.

7. Click Add Item and clickClose.

Task 4: Create a simplified rep by excluding the interior models.

1. With the found models stillselected, right-click and selectSet Representation to >Exclude.

2. Start the View Manager .On the Simp Rep tab, right-clickMaster Rep(+) and select Save.

3. Edit the Simplified Rep field to no_interior and click OK.4. Double-click Master Rep and click Close.

This completes the procedure.

Module 10 | Page 22 © 2012 PTC

Page 311: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Defining Simplified Reps using RulesYou can use rules to automatically search for, select, andperform an action on components in a simplified rep.

Model Rules:

• Evaluate Rules• Edit RulesRule Condition:

• Rule Editor• Similar to Search toolRule Action:

• Exclude• Master Rep• Geometry Rep• Graphics Rep Figure 1 – Rule Conditions

Defining Simplified Reps using RulesWithin a simplified rep, you can configure rule actions that automaticallysearch for, select, and perform an action on components. If components areadded or removed from the assembly, you can return to the rule actionsand update the rule. You can also create multiple rules within a simplifiedrep. If rules attempt an action on the same component, the latest rule in thelist overrides an earlier rule. You can also reorder the rules within the RuleActions list.Within the simplified rep component chooser, you can create or edit ruleconditions by clicking Model Rules > Edit Rules. To evaluate rules thatalready exist in the simplified rep, click Model Rules > Evaluate Rules.Each rule action consists of a rep action and a condition. When creating acondition, the Rule Editor dialog box appears. The Rule Editor dialog box isnearly identical to the Search tool, except that the resulting search rule isexecuted inside the simplified rep. Like the Search tool, you can also builda compound rule. Selecting Build Query from the Options drop-down listenables you to add multiple queries to the search. This enables you tonarrow down the search results by combining multiple searches togetherwith AND/OR operators.

ConditionsTo define the condition, the rule editor enables you to search using variouscriteria, including the following. Note that depending on the search type,you may need to edit the settings to search for components or solid modelsaccordingly.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 23

Page 312: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Attributes– Name – Search for components by name. You can use wildcards such

as asterisk (*) to select multiple similarly named components. Forexample, you can search for BOLT* or *BOLT to locate all componentswith names starting or ending with the text BOLT.

– Type – Search for components by type. For example, you can searchfor an assembly to locate sub-assemblies, or you can search for bulkitems, parts, or skeletons.

– Expression – Search for components by matching a parameterexpression. For example, if all components have a parameter formaterial, you can select all components that have ALUM as the valuefor the material parameter.

– Size – Search for solid models by size. The system can locatecomponents based on their absolute or relative physical size.

• History– ID – Search for a component with a particular component ID number.– Number – Search for components with a specified component number

or range.• Status– Regeneration – Search for components that are frozen, child of frozen,

failed, packaged, suppressed, and so on.– Layer – Search for components on a particular name layer.– Display – Search for solid models that are on a particular simplified rep,

style state, or are currently hidden.– Parent/Child – Search for solid models that are parents or children of

a selected component. Options are available to limit the scope andextent of the parent/child relation.

– Copied Refs – Search for components that have copied references thatare edited to a selected status.

• Geometry– Zone – Search for components or solid models that are inside or outside

a defined zone.– Distance – Select items based on their distance from another item.– Exterior Comps – Search for components or solid models that are on

the exterior of an assembly.

Rep ActionsAfter you define the condition (search rule), you can select a rep action to beperformed automatically on the results of the search. Common rep actionsinclude the following:

• Exclude – The components selected by the rule are edited to Excludein the simplified rep.

• Master Rep – The components selected by the rule are edited to MasterRep in the simplified rep.

• Geometry Rep – The components selected by the rule are edited toGeometry Rep in the simplified rep.

Module 10 | Page 24 © 2012 PTC

Page 313: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Graphics Rep – The components selected by the rule are edited toGraphics Rep in the simplified rep.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 25

Page 314: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Defining Simplified Reps using Rules

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Rules DRILL_RULE.ASM

Task 1: Create a simplified rep using rules.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar. On the SimpRep tab, click New. Type no-bolts_no-ext and press ENTER.

3. Click Model Rules > Edit Rules from the Edit:NO-BOLTS_NO-EXTcomponent chooser.

4. In the NO-BOLTS_NO-EXT dialog box, do the following:• Click Add Condition .• Right-click Select condition and select New.• Edit the rule name Cond0001 to bolts, then middle-click.

5. In the Rule Editor:1 dialog box,do the following:• Ensure Solid Model isselected from the Look fordrop-down list.

• On the Attributes tab, ensureName is the selected rule.

• Ensure that is equal to isselected from the Comparisondrop-down list.

• In the Value field, type BOLT*.• Click OK.

6. In the NO-BOLTS_NO-EXT dialog box, do the following:• Click Add Condition .• Right-click Select condition and select New.• Edit the rule name Cond0001 to exterior, then middle-click.

Module 10 | Page 26 © 2012 PTC

Page 315: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

7. In the Rule Editor:1 dialog box, do the following:• Select the Geometry tab, then select Exterior Comps as the rule.• Ensure that is equal to is selected from the Comparison drop-downlist.

• Select 4 from the Value (Quality Level) drop-down list.• Click OK in the Exterior Comps dialog box.• Click Preview Results and click OK in the Confirm Evaluationdialog box.

• Press CTRL+A to select the 53 items in the list and click OK.• Click OK in the Confirm Evaluation dialog box.

The Confirm Evaluation dialog box warns you that, because youare working in a simplified rep with excluded components, youmay need to bring additional models into session to perform theevaluation.

8. In the NO-BOLTS_NO-EXTdialog box, ensure that the RepAction for both rules is set toExclude and then click OK.

9. In the Edit:NO-BOLTS_NO-EXT component chooser, do the following:• Right-click DRILL_RULE.ASM and click Set Representation to> Master.

• Click Model Rules > Evaluate Rules.• Click OK to complete the simplified rep.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 27

Page 316: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Assemble a bolt in the NO-BOLTS_NO-EXT simplified rep.

1. In the ribbon, click Assemble

from the Component group.Select BOLT_2_5-12.PRT andclick Open.

2. Assemble the bolt to the hole, asshown in the figure.

3. Click Complete Component .

4. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar. Onthe Simp Rep tab, click Edit >Evaluate Model Rules

5. Click Close.

Because the rulesare re-evaluated, theBOLT_2_5-12.PRT isexcluded from the simplifiedrep, along with all the otherbolt models.

This completes the procedure.

Module 10 | Page 28 © 2012 PTC

Page 317: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Using On-Demand Simplified RepsOn-demand functionality enables you to work with a minimumamount of model data and automatically retrieve and removeadditional design data as required.

On-Demand Retrieval Settings:

• Prompt• Never prompt• DisableOther On-Demand Settings:

• Activation• Regeneration• Selection• Editing• Cleanup

Figure 1 – On-Demand Settings

Using On-Demand Simplified RepsTypically, when an assembly component is excluded from a simplifiedrepresentation, it cannot be seen or selected. When the same componentis edited to a geometry rep, its geometry is available to be selected forassembly or measurements, but the component's features are not availablefor selection or modification. Furthermore, if the same component is editedto a graphics rep, the component is visible but geometry and features arenot available for selection.Before the introduction of on-demand functionality, if you had a componentthat was edited to a graphics or geometry rep, you had to manually edit therepresentation of that component to a rep suitable to the given task.On-demand functionality can manage the representation levels ofcomponents automatically, thereby improving system performance.On-demand functionality enables you to work with a minimum amount ofmodel data and automatically retrieve and remove additional design dataas required.You can control on-demand settings in the following ways:• Specify whether and when to retrieve components not completely includedin a simplified representation.

• Retrieve master or geometry representations of components currently in anon-editable rep such as a graphics rep.

• Define the conditions under which the on-demand simplified representationsupdate dynamically.

• Enable or disable dynamic updating.• Retrieve and erase components that you need to reference temporarilywhile you are working.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 29

Page 318: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

On-Demand Retrieval SettingsThere are three modes of operation for on-demand retrieval:

• Prompt – A confirmation is required before on-demand retrieval.• Never prompt (the default) – Models are retrieved without confirmation.• Disable – On-demand retrieval is disabled.You can also retrieve back up references. You can select the RetrieveBacked Up References option to retrieve the original model of any backed-upreferences. Upon retrieval, the backed-up references are updated to reflectedits in the original models.

Other On-Demand SettingsThere are several additional settings for on-demand reps, which areorganized into the following categories:

• Activation– On-Demand Activation – Retrieve the master representation for

activating a component.• Regeneration– On-Demand Regeneration – Retrieve parent components in a higher

representation level upon model regeneration.– Automatic or Master – Enable automatic selection of the representation

type to retrieve, or you can retrieve all models in their masterrepresentation.

• Selection– On-Demand Selection – Retrieve components in a higher representation

level for selecting internal items.– Automatic or Master – Select the models to retrieve.

• Editing– On-Demand Editing – Retrieve simplified components and their parents

in a higher representation level for editing purposes.– Automatic, Master, or Master with Ancestors – Select models to retrieve

when editing.• Cleanup– On-Demand Cleanup – Remove unmodified simplified representations

retrieved on-demand.– Restore and Restore Representation and Erase – Maintain removed

models in session or erase retrieved models from session.

Module 10 | Page 30 © 2012 PTC

Page 319: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Memory ManagementIn some cases components that are retrieved using on-demand reps mayremain in memory. To erase on-demand components that are not currently inuse, click File > Manage Session > Erase Unused Model Reps.

When you modify values of components in a graphicsrepresentation, the edits do not take effect until the model isregenerated. To avoid losing changes, regenerate the assemblybefore you remove the retrieved components from memory.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 31

Page 320: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Using On-Demand Simplified Reps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_On-DemandDRILL_ON-DEMAND.ASM

Task 1: Reference models opened using on-demand.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Start the View Managerfrom the In Graphics toolbar. Onthe Simp Rep tab, double-clickthe Light rep.

3. Click Close.

4. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Columns fromthe drop-down list.• In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, select Simplified Repsfrom the Type drop-down list.

• Click OK to close the dialog box.

In the model tree, notice that several models are excluded and twohave their status set to Graphics Rep.

5. In the model tree, expand ENGINE.ASM, GEARBOX_CHUCK.ASM,and DRILL_CHUCK.ASM.

6. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.7. Click OK to erase the listed components from memory.

8. In the ribbon, click Assemble from the Component group. SelectSPARK_PLUG.PRT and click Open.

9. Select the appropriateCoincident surfaces,as shown in the figure.

10. Click Complete Component .

The model tree updates again and the cylinder no longer displaysas a geometry rep.

Module 10 | Page 32 © 2012 PTC

Page 321: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

11. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.12. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Unused Model Reps.13. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed and click OK.

Task 2: Edit the on-demand settings.

1. Click File > Options.2. Select Assembly and click the On Demand Settings button from the

component retrieval settings group.3. Click Prompt.4. Click OK.5. Click OK to close the Creo Parametric Options dialog box.

6. In the ribbon, click Assemble from the Component group. SelectSTD_BIT_25MM.PRT and click Open.

7. Select the CHUCK.PRT, the part to which the drill bit is to beassembled.

8. From the On Demand Prompt dialog box, click Geometry and OK.

The model tree updates and lists the chuck as a geometry rep.

9. Assemble the bit, as shown inthe figure.

10. Click Complete Component .11. Click File > Manage Session >

Erase Not Displayed.

There is nothing to erase. The Restore Representation and Erasecleanup setting automatically removed the model from memory.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 33

Page 322: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating External Simplified RepsYou can use external simplified representations to storerepresentations of assemblies without modifying the originalassembly.

External Simplified Reps:

• Separate *.ASM file.• Actions do not affect thereference assembly.

• Can retrieve in the Open Repdialog box.

Figure 1 – Copy As External

Figure 2 – Open External Rep

Creating External Simplified RepsExternal simplified representations are stored as special assembly typefiles with a standard *.ASM extension. Because it is a separate assemblyfile, you can even manage it using a data management system such asPro/INTRALINK or Windchill PDMLink.

Think of an external simplified rep as a placeholder for a simplified view of adesign assembly. You can create multiple external simplified representationsto correspond to different assembly areas and levels of detail. Low-levelcomponents without top-level and intermediate-level assemblies can beincluded, so multiple users can work simultaneously. The use of externalsimplified representations minimizes the risk of accidental modifications totop-level assemblies.

All the components in an external simplified representation are the same asthose in the reference assembly. Therefore, it is not necessary to propagatemodifications made to the external simplified representation or reference

Module 10 | Page 34 © 2012 PTC

Page 323: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

assembly. All modifications to external simplified representations areautomatically reflected in the reference assembly.

• External simplified representations are stored in a separate assembly(.ASM) file with an external simplified representation subtype.

• The creation, redefinition, or removal of an external simplifiedrepresentation does not change the reference assembly.

• It is not necessary for the reference assembly to be in session whenworking with external simplified representations.

• You can include components from any level of the reference assembly inthe external simplified representation.

• You can exclude the reference assembly and intermediate sub-assemblieseven if low-level components are included.

• When a model contains substituted components, the top-level assembly isalways included in the external simplified representation.

• The location of components included in external simplified representationsis fully associated with corresponding components of the referenceassembly.

• You can specify whether components included in external simplifiedrepresentations can be modified or used for reference purposes only.

• You can create references within external simplified representations. CreoParametric treats such references as if they were created in the referenceassembly.

• You can perform component and feature operations on the top level of anexternal simplified representation model.

There are three ways to create an external simplified rep:

• You can click File > New. In the New dialog box, you can select thereference assembly model during the assembly creation process.

• From the view manager, select a simplified representation and click Edit> Copy As External.

• You can also click File > Save As > Save a Copy to save a copy of yourassembly by specifying an external simplified representation as the type offile to be saved.

Opening an External Simplified RepYou can open an external simplified rep by selecting its file name in the Opendialog box. Also, you can open an external simplified rep that is related to amodel by clicking the External Rep button in the Open Rep dialog box.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 35

Page 324: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating External Simplified Reps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_ExternalDRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM

Task 1: Create an external simplified rep using the Copy As Externalfeature.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click View Manager fromthe In Graphics toolbar anddouble-click the Engine rep.

3. Right-click Engine from theNames list and select Copy AsExternal.

4. Type engine_ext and click OKto open the external rep.

5. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK.

6. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.7. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed and click OK.

8. Click Open .9. The Open dialog box appears. Select, but do not open,

DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM.10. Select Open Representation from the Open drop-down list.11. The Open Rep dialog box appears. Click External Rep.12. Select ENGINE_EXT.ASM and click Open.13. In the model tree, expand DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM. Notice only the

components from the Engine rep are included.

14. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.

The model tree only shows components included in the externalsimplified rep. The view manager of an external rep only lists twosimplified rep types, Definition Rep and Default Rep.

15. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.16. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed and click OK.

Only components of the external rep are brought into session.

Module 10 | Page 36 © 2012 PTC

Page 325: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Create a new external simplified rep.

1. Click New .2. In the New dialog box, select Assembly and Ext. Simp.Rep.3. Edit the name to eng_carb_ext and click OK.4. Select DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM and click Open.

5. In the Edit:DEFINITION REP component chooser, do the following:• Right-click DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM and click Set Representationto > Exclude.

• Expand the DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM node.• Select ENGINE.ASM. Press CTRL, right-click CARBURETOR.ASM,and click Set Representation to > Master.

• Click OK to complete the external simplified rep.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 37

Page 326: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module 10 | Page 38 © 2012 PTC

Page 327: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module11Creating and Using Assembly Structure andSkeletons

Module OverviewCreating an assembly structure and using skeletons enables you to plan anddesign stages of assemblies. In this module, you learn how to create anassembly structure in the model tree that you can use to plan the assembly.

You also learn how to use skeletons for space claims, interfaces, componentplacement, and motion.

Finally, you learn how to create components from shared skeleton references.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Create an assembly structure.• Create skeletons for space claims, interfaces, and placement.• Copy models into skeletons.• Create multiple skeletons with connections.• Share skeleton geometry.• Create a motion skeleton and a corresponding sketch.• Create bodies and assign connections for a motion skeleton.• Create solid models from a motion skeleton.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 1

Page 328: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Understanding SkeletonsYou can use a skeleton to create the framework of your design.

Figure 1 – Skeleton

Purpose:

• Design Framework• Common Reference• Propagate ChangeSkeleton Properties:

• First Component• No Mass Props• Blue ColorContents:

• Datum Features• Sketches• Surfaces

Figure 2 – Final Design

Understanding SkeletonsSkeletons are powerful tools that you can use to create the 3-D layout orframework of an assembly design. Skeletons can serve as a commonreference source for geometry and assembling components. Any edits to theskeleton automatically update components assembled to the skeleton andcomponents that utilize shared geometry.

Skeletons are commonly used to do the following:

• Create space claims for components.• Create interfaces and placement references between components.• Provide motion between components – either by modifying skeletondimensions or through the use of mechanism connections.

Skeletons are components that are given special properties. When created,a skeleton automatically becomes the first component of the assembly sothat each subsequent component can reference it. Skeletons do not affectthe mass properties of the assembly, regardless of the geometry created inthem. In addition, skeletons are easily recognized in the assembly due to theblue color they are assigned by default to help distinguish them from othercomponents.

Skeletons typically contain a variety of datum features such as datumplanes, axes, points, and coordinate systems. Skeletons also commonlycontain sketches and surfaces to represent geometry that will be createdin components. Although not as common, a skeleton can contain solidgeometry; however, you can only share the surfaces of the solids.

Module 11 | Page 2 © 2012 PTC

Page 329: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Benefits of a Skeleton

An example of the advantages of using a skeleton when assemblingcomponents can be seen in the figure with the following scenario:

In this non-skeleton design scenario:

• Component A is assembled first.• Component B is then assembled to A.• Component C is then assembled byreferencing components A and B.

• Component D is then assembled byreferencing components B and C. No Skeleton

This scenario can cause the following problems:

• Components A and B cannot be deleted since the other componentsreference it.

• If major changes are necessary for multiple components (for example:overall length change), each component has to be modified separately,possibly causing a regeneration failure of the next downstreamcomponent.

In this skeleton-based design scenario:

• Components A, B, C, and D are eachassembled to the skeleton and not toeach other.

• Components A, B, C, and D eachcontain shared geometry referencefrom the skeleton.

With Skeleton

This skeleton-based design scenario has the following advantages:

• Components A, B, C, and D can each be deleted separately since theyare assembled to the skeleton independently.

• If major changes are necessary for multiple components (for example:overall length change), the skeleton can be modified, propagating editsto each one of the components that share skeleton geometry.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 3

Page 330: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating an Assembly StructureYou can begin your design with a populated assembly structure.

Purpose:

• Up Front Planning• Top-Down DesignComponent Types:

• Skeletons• Unplaced• Included• Packaged• Bulk Items

Figure 1 – Assembly Structure

Creating an Assembly StructureIn the design process, you can create the structure of an assembly first,without defining any component geometry or specific placement constraints.Creating an assembly structure helps you plan your project by enabling youto delegate tasks to team members. You can also assign non-geometricinformation up front in the form of parameters such as part number, cost,supplier, and material.

Component TypesNew components for assembly structures are typically created from modeltemplates. You can create model templates for standard and sheetmetalparts, as well as assemblies. You should also use these templates whencreating skeletons.You can create the following types of components in an assembly structure:• Skeletons – You can create one or more skeletons per assembly. Thefirst skeleton is assembled by the system using a default constraint.Subsequent skeletons are assembled like typical components. You canassemble them by default or by using constraints or connections. You canhave multiple skeletons at the top level or a single top-level skeleton andmultiple skeletons at the sub-assembly level.

• Parts – You can create standard or sheetmetal parts. You can assemblethem by default if suitable geometry does not exist, or you can assemblethem using constraints or connections to the skeleton or other components.

• Sub-assemblies – You can create sub-assemblies, as desired, to organizethe assembly.

• Unplaced Components – You can create a new component orsub-assembly and then select the Unplaced option. The Unplaced option

Module 11 | Page 4 © 2012 PTC

Page 331: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

leaves the new component listed in the model tree, but it is physicallyunplaced and not visible in the model. You can redefine the component tolocate it with constraints or connections at any time. Unplaced componentsare shown in gray with a dashed rectangle in the model tree.

• Included Components – You can include existing components orsub-assemblies in your assembly structure. This is useful for standardcomponents or hardware that has been previously modeled. You canredefine the component to locate it with constraints or connections at anytime.

• Packaged Components – If you know an approximate location for newor existing parts or assemblies, you can assemble them, drag them to alocation, and then complete the component with zero or partial constraints.This is particularly useful for situations when a component will be matedto a plane, but the exact location is not known yet. You can redefine thecomponent to locate it with additional constraints or connections at anytime. Packaged components appear with a small hollow rectangle next tothe component icon in the model tree. Children of packaged componentsappear with a double rectangle icon.

• Bulk Items – You can also add bulk items to an assembly structure torepresent components that do not require design geometry. Typical bulkitems include lubricants, adhesives, paint, and so on. Bulk items arecomponents that appear in the model tree and the Bill of Materials, but donot contain any modeled geometry. However, you can add parameters tobulk items, such as a description, type, or quantity.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 5

Page 332: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Assembly Structure

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Structure AC40.ASM

Task 1: Create an assembly structure in the empty assembly.

1. Enable only the following DatumDisplay types: .

2. Click Create from theComponent group.

3. Select Skeleton Model asthe type and Standard as thesubtype, if necessary. Edit thename to main_skel and clickOK.

4. Click Browse and double-clickMM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT in theChoose template dialog box.

5. Click OK in the Creation Optionsdialog box.

Watch the structure you are creating develop in the model tree asyou work through this procedure.

6. Click Create from the Component group.7. Select Part as the type. Edit the name to frame and click OK.8. Ensure that the Leave Component Unplaced check box is cleared

and click OK.9. Right-click, and select Default Constraint.10. Click Complete Component .

Module 11 | Page 6 © 2012 PTC

Page 333: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

11. Click Create .12. Select Subassembly as the type and Standard as the subtype, if

necessary. Edit the name to engine and click OK.13. Click Browse in the Creation Options dialog box.14. Double-click MM_KG_SEC_ASSY.ASM in the Choose template

dialog box.15. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.16. Right-click and select Default Constraint.17. Click Complete Component .18. In the model tree, right-click ENGINE.ASM and select Activate.

19. Click Create from the Component group.20. Select Part as the type. Edit the name to block and click OK.

21. Click Browse in the Creation Options dialog box.22. Double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT in the Choose template dialog

box.23. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.24. Right-click and select Default Constraint.25. Click Complete Component .

26. Click Create from theComponent group.

27. Edit the name to crank and clickOK.

28. Expand the ENGINE.ASM node.29. Select the Leave Component

Unplaced check box and clickOK.

Unplaced components are identified with a special gray icon.

30. Click Create .31. Edit the name to piston and click OK.32. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.

33. Click Create .34. Edit the name to rod and click OK.35. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 7

Page 334: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

36. In the model tree, right-clickAC40.ASM and select Activate.

37. Click the Assemble drop-downmenu in the Component groupand select Include.

38. Select BOLT.PRT and clickOpen.

39. Select BOLT_8 from the list andclick Open.

This completes the procedure.

Module 11 | Page 8 © 2012 PTC

Page 335: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Skeletons for Space ClaimsYou can use skeletons to define and share common designreferences.

Figure 1 – Space Claim

Purpose:

• Claim 3-D Space for Components• Common Reference• Propagate ChangeContents:

• Surfaces• Datum Features

Figure 2 – Completed Design

Creating Skeletons for Space Claims TheoryYou can use skeletons to allocate or claim 3-D space before modeling orassembling the components. A skeleton can provide a common referencefor geometry to be shared to multiple components. You can then modify thespace claim features in a skeleton, propagating change to one or multiplecomponents.

Space claim skeletons are comprised of the following:

• Surfaces – Typically, surfaces and datum planes are used for space claimreferences in a skeleton. You can create open or enclosed surfaces todefine the occupied volume for components or sub-assemblies. Thesurface can be as simple or as complex as required to convey the designintent. You can also use the external shrinkwrap functionality to create anengulfing surface over an existing part or sub-assembly to represent acomponent that is to be placed in the assembly.

• Datum Features – A series of offset datum planes can also be useful toclaim space for components. Offset planes are easily adjustable in size,and you can use them alone or in conjunction with surfaces in the skeleton.

In the figures, a skeleton model contains surfaces used to claimspace for the interior engine components, such as the piston,connecting rod, and crankshaft. An offset datum plane is used tohelp claim space for the overall engine block height.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 9

Page 336: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Skeletons for Space Claims

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Skeletons_Space-Claims AC40.ASM

Task 1: Add surface geometry to the skeleton model.

1. Enable only the following DatumDisplay types: .

2. In the model tree, selectMAIN_SKEL.PRT. Right-clickand select Open.

3. In the ribbon, select the Modeltab, if necessary. Click Plane

in the Datum group.4. Select datum plane TOP and

drag the handle to an offset of54.

5. Select the Properties tab. Editthe datum's name to height andclick OK.

6. With the datum plane HEIGHTstill selected, click Extrudefrom the Shapes group.

7. Sketch a 21 diameter circlecentered on the sketchreferences.

8. Click OK .

9. In the dashboard, click Surface.

10. In the dashboard, edit the depth.Click To Selected and selectdatum plane TOP.

11. Click Complete Feature .12. Press CTRL+D to reorient.

Module 11 | Page 10 © 2012 PTC

Page 337: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

13. In the model tree, select datumplane FRONT and click Extrude

from the Shape group.

14. Click Sketch View from theSetup group, if necessary.

15. Sketch a 28 diameter circlecentered on the sketchreferences.

16. Click OK .

17. In the dashboard, click Surface.

18. Edit the depth. Click Both Sidesand type 32.

19. Click Complete Feature .20. Press CTRL+D to reorient.

21. Click Plane Display todisable the display of datumplanes.

22. Right-click Extrude 2 and selectEdit to view the features of thenew extrude feature.

Task 2: Merge the surface geometry.

1. Click in the background of thegraphics window to de-select allgeometry and features.

2. In the model tree, press CTRLand select EXTRUDE 1 andEXTRUDE 2.

3. Select Merge from theEditing group.

4. In the graphics window, clickthe direction arrows so thatthe merge preview appears, asshown in the figure.

5. Click Complete Feature .6. Click in the background of the

graphics window to de-select allgeometry and features.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 11

Page 338: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Skeletons for Placement ReferencesYou can use skeletons to define placement references.

Purpose:

• Define component interfaces• Define placement references• Propagate changeContents:

• Sketches• Surfaces• Datum features

Figure 1 – Placement References

Figure 2 – Component InterfacesFigure 3 – Models Assembled

to a Skeleton

Creating Skeletons for Placement ReferencesYou can use skeletons to define the interfaces between adjacent or matingcomponents, and also to provide common references for assemblingcomponents.

Skeleton features created to represent interfaces can provide the shapeand/or location of the interfaces between components. You can copy theinterfaces to multiple components to provide a common reference for creatingsolid geometry. You can modify the interface features in the skeleton,propagating changes to one or multiple components.

You can also use skeletons to define component placement. Therefore, youcan modify the placement of single or multiple components with edits to theskeleton. Component placement examples include the following:

• An axis in the skeleton to provide a partial reference for assembling acomponent.

• A coordinate system to provide a complete reference for assembling acomponent.

• A series of sketched lines representing an adjustable mechanical linkage.Once the components are assembled to the skeleton, you can edit lengthsand/or angles of the skeleton sketches to update the model locationsand/or size.

Module 11 | Page 12 © 2012 PTC

Page 339: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Typically, sketches, surfaces, and various datum features are used forinterface and placement references in a skeleton. These features can be assimple or as complex as required to convey the design intent.

In Figure 2, a skeleton model contains a sketched line, surfaces,and axes to represent the length and hole interfaces of thecomponent. You can use these references to create, not only theconnecting rod shown in the figure, but also other components thatassemble to it.In Figure 3, datum planes and axes are created to define commonaxis interfaces. These axes can be referenced by the engine block,piston, and crankshaft to create geometry. In addition, the bolts canalso use the axes to define their placement.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 13

Page 340: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Skeletons for PlacementReferences

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Skeletons_Placement AC40.ASM

Task 1: Create axes for use as assembly placement references.

1. Enable only the following DatumDisplay types: .

2. In the model tree, right-clickMAIN_SKEL.PRT and selectOpen.

3. Click Axis from the Datumgroup.

4. Select a surface of EXTRUDE 1,as shown.

5. In the Datum Axis dialog box,select the Properties tab. Editthe name to cyl and click OK.

6. Click in the background of thegraphics window to de-select theaxis CYL.

7. Click Axis from the Datumgroup.

8. Select a surface of EXTRUDE 2,as shown.

9. In the Datum Axis dialog box,select the Properties tab. Editthe name to crank and click OK.

Module 11 | Page 14 © 2012 PTC

Page 341: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Create datum planes for use as assembly placement references.

1. Enable Plane Display .2. Select datum plane RIGHT and select Plane from the Datum

group.

3. Drag the handle to an offset of20, as shown in the figure.

4. On the Display tab, enablethe Adjust Outline check boxand select Reference from thedrop-down list.

5. Select the upper cylindricalsurface of EXTRUDE 2 as thereference.

6. On the Properties tab, edit thename to offset and click OK.

Task 3: Create an axis and reference the datum plane OFFSET.

1. With datum plane OFFSET

already selected, click Axisfrom the Datum group.

2. Move the Datum Axis dialog boxas necessary and click Plane

.3. Select datum plane FRONT and

drag the handle to a forwardoffset of 10, as shown in thefigure.

4. Click OK to close the DatumPlane dialog box.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 15

Page 342: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

5. On the Display tab, enablethe Adjust Outline check boxand select Reference from thedrop-down list.

6. Select the upper cylindricalsurface of EXTRUDE 2 as thereference.

7. On the Properties tab, edit thename to HOLE1 and click OK.

8. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select allgeometry and features.

This completes the procedure.

Module 11 | Page 16 © 2012 PTC

Page 343: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Copying a Model to a SkeletonYou can create a skeleton by copying another model.

Convert Standard Part to Skeleton:

• Create Standard Part• Create Assembly– Create Skeleton Component– Copy From Existing– Browse to Standard Part

• Becomes a Skeleton– Placed in Assembly– Skeleton Color

Figure 1 – Copy from Existing

Figure 2 – Standard Part Figure 3 – Copied to Skeleton

Copying a Model to a SkeletonYou can convert a standard part model to create a skeleton. Examplescenarios of when you can use this technique include the following:

• A standard part model is used as a makeshift skeleton for an assembly andyou wish to convert it to an actual skeleton.

• A skeleton is created for another design and can be reused for the currentdesign.

• You are working with other team members who have modeled skeletons fortheir portions of the assembly and you wish to create a top-level assemblywith multiple skeletons.

• Rapidly creating and assembling multiple skeletons in the current assembly.To copy an existing model to a skeleton, you create a component in thecontext of the assembly and select Skeleton as the component type. Then,you select Copy From Existing and browse to the existing model. The modelis copied into the current assembly and assumes skeleton properties, suchas the default blue skeleton color.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 17

Page 344: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Multiple SkeletonsYou can add multiple skeletons to your assembly.

Create Multiple Skeletons:

• multiple_skeletons_allowedAssemble Skeletons:

• By Default• Constraints• ConnectionsTechniques:

• Independent skeletons• Hierarchy of skeletons• Represent one or manycomponents

Figure 1 – 3-D Skeleton Models

Creating Multiple SkeletonsIn the design process, you can create the structure of an assembly first,without defining any component geometry or specific placement constraintsto locate components. Creating an assembly structure helps you plan yourproject by enabling delegation of tasks to team members. You can alsoassign non-geometric information up front in the form of parameters such aspart number, cost, supplier, and material.

You can assemble the first skeleton using the system default constraint.You can assemble subsequent skeletons like typical components. You canassemble them by default or by using constraints or connections. You cancreate multiple skeletons at the top level and at the sub-assembly levels.

There are several different techniques that you can use when working withmultiple skeletons, including the following:

• Create the multiple skeletons independent of each other so that you canmodify each skeleton without affecting the other skeletons.

• Use multiple skeletons in a hierarchy. With this technique, you create amain skeleton and then share references to several other skeletons. Theadditional skeletons can be at the top level also or in a sub-assembly.Modifying the main skeleton then propagates change to multiple otherskeletons, causing several components to update at once.

When creating multiple skeletons, consider whether each skeleton representsone or many components. A skeleton can also represent an entiresub-assembly.

The figure shown illustrates multiple independent skeletons in use.You use the MAIN skeleton to share references to the FRAME andalso the BLOCK in ENGINE.ASM. The CRANK, PISTON, and RODskeletons are additional skeletons assembled to the MAIN skeletonusing connections to provide mechanism movement.

Module 11 | Page 18 © 2012 PTC

Page 345: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Multiple Skeletons

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Skeletons_Multiple AC40.ASM

Task 1: Create and assemble the crank skeleton.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .2. Click File > Options. The Creo Parametric Options window appears.3. Select Configuration Editor from the menu on the left .

4. Click Add....5. In the Option name field of the Options window, type

multiple_skeletons_allowed.6. Edit the Option value drop-down menu to Yes, if necessary, and click

OK.

The multiple_skeletons_allowed configuration file optiondetermines whether multiple skeletons can be created asreplacement parts.

7. Click OK and click No to confirm that the configuration edits made areapplied to the current session only.

If the Yes option is selected, the settings are saved to aconfiguration file and loaded during the next session.

8. In the model tree, press CTRL and select FRAME.PRT andENGINE.ASM.

9. Right-click and select Hide.10. In the ribbon, select the Model tab, if necessary.11. Select MAIN_SKEL.PRT in the model tree.12. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select

Component Display Style > Transparent.

13. Click Create from the Component group.14. Select Skeleton Model as the type. Edit the name to crank_skel

and click OK.15. Click Browse. Select CRANK_GEOM.PRT in the Choose template

dialog box, and click Open.16. Ensure that the Leave Component Unplaced check box is cleared.17. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 19

Page 346: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

18. In the dashboard, select Pin from the User Defined drop-down list.19. Select the CRANK axes in both models to define axis alignment.20. Select the FRONT datum plane in both models to define translation.

21. Click Complete Component .

Task 2: Create and assemble the piston skeleton.

1. Click Create from the Component group.2. Edit the name to piston_skel and click OK.3. Click Browse. Select PISTON_GEOM.PRT in the Choose template

dialog box and click Open.4. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.5. In the dashboard, select Slider from the User Defined drop-down

list.

6. Select the CYL axes in bothmodels to define axis alignment.

7. Select the FRONT datum planein both models to define rotation.

8. Press CTRL+ALT and right-clickto drag the skeleton into theapproximate position shown inthe figure.

9. Click Complete Component .

Module 11 | Page 20 © 2012 PTC

Page 347: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 3: Create and assemble the connecting rod skeleton.

1. Click Create .2. Edit the name to rod_skel and click OK.3. Click Browse. Select ROD_GEOM.PRT in the Choose template

dialog box and click Open.4. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.

5. In the dashboard, select Pinfrom the User Defined drop-downlist.

6. Select the PIN_1 axes in bothmodels to define axis alignment.

7. Select the FRONT datum planein the ROD_SKEL.PRT andCRANK_SKEL.PRT models todefine translation.

8. Right-click and select Add Set.

9. In the dashboard, edit theconnection to Cylinder .

10. Click Plane Display todisable their display.

11. Select the PIN_2 axes inboth ROD_SKEL.PRT andPISTON_SKEL.PRT to defineaxis alignment.

12. Click Complete Component .

13. Click Axis Display to disable their display.

14. Click Drag Components from the Component group. Select thecylindrical shaft surface of the CRANK_SKEL and drag it throughits motion.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 21

Page 348: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Sharing Skeleton GeometryYou can copy references from a skeleton into other models.

Publish Geometry Feature:

• Identify and CollectCopy Geometry Feature:

• Publish Geometry• Surface Sets• Chains• References

Figure 1 – Copy Geometry

Figure 2 – Geometry Copied from Skeleton

Sharing Skeleton GeometryOnce skeletons have been created, you can share geometry with the solidcomponents. You can use the shared geometry as references to build solidfeatures. It is through the use of shared geometry that the skeleton canpropagate edits to the component features. Note that this step is not requiredfor components that are only being assembled to the skeleton.

There are two main data sharing features, Publish Geometry and CopyGeometry. To create these features, you activate the component, then createthe data sharing feature in the context of the assembly.

Publish Geometry FeatureThe Publish Geometry feature enables you to identify and collect a selectionof references from your skeleton and apply the references to a feature. Withthe Publish Geometry feature, you can select surface sets, chains (edges orsketches), and references (datum features).

For example, in a skeleton model you typically have a series of referencesdestined for component A and other references destined for componentB. Some of these references can be common, while others may not be.You can create one Publish Geometry feature called FOR_PART_A andanother called FOR_PART_B. Each Publish Geometry feature contains theselection of references for the respective target component. Be aware thatthe Publish Geometry feature does not share any geometry outside of theskeleton. It simply enables you to organize the selections before copying.

Module 11 | Page 22 © 2012 PTC

Page 349: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

This is particularly useful when working on a team where others may need toreference a skeleton you have created.

The Publish Geometry feature is entirely optional. Its use dependson the requirements and complexity of the design.

Copy Geom FeatureThe Copy Geometry feature enables you to share references outside of askeleton by copying them into a target component. This target componentcan be another skeleton or a solid part. Once copied, you can reference thecopied geometry to create features in the target component. The features inthe target component that reference the copied geometry update when youmake changes to the skeleton. You can select the following to copy:

• Publish Geometry Feature (containing a selection of its own)• Surface Sets (individual, selection sets, or quilts)• Chains (sketches, datum curves, edges)• References (datum planes, axes, points or coordinate systems)Keep in mind the following Copy Geometry feature behaviors:

• You have control over the dependency of a Copy Geometry feature. Youcan make the resulting copied geometry dependent or independent ofthe skeleton model.

• You can select from only one model when creating a Copy Geometryfeature. If you need to copy references from multiple skeletons, you cancreate multiple Copy Geometry features.

• Copy Geometry features do not enable you to copy solid features. This iswhy solids are not typically used to create a skeleton. However, you areable to copy the outer surfaces of a solid feature.

• You can create the Copy Geometry feature with the Assembly Contextoption or the External option.– The Assembly Context option relies on how the target component

is assembled when creating the copied geometry, thus creating adependency between the target part and its parent assembly.

– The External option avoids this dependency by enabling you to selectthe model to copy from, and to locate the copied geometry in the targetcomponent by a default constraint or by selecting coordinate systems.

The figure shown illustrates a selection of surfaces and datumfeatures being copied from the skeleton using a Copy Geometryfeature. The resulting Copy Geometry feature is also shown alongwith the model tree.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 23

Page 350: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Sharing Skeleton Geometry

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Skeletons_Sharing BLOCK.PRT

Task 1: Copy references from MAIN_SKEL.PRT to the BLOCK.PRT.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Click Copy Geometry in the Get Data group.

3. In the dashboard, de-select Published Geometry Only and thenclick Open .

4. Select MAIN_SKEL.PRT and click Open.

5. In the Placement dialog box,click Coord Sys and selectPRT_CSYS_DEF from themodel tree of each model.

6. Click OK to close the dialog box.7. In the dashboard, select the

References tab and activate theSurface Sets field.

8. In the docked accessory window,query-select the entire surfacequilt of MAIN_SKEL.PRT.

9. Resize the accessory window asrequired.

10. Activate the Chain field andselect the curve feature shownin the figure.

11. Activate the References field.Press CTRL and select datumplane OFFSET and the axesHOLE1 and HOLE2 from theModel Tree(2).

12. Click Complete Feature .

13. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

Module 11 | Page 24 © 2012 PTC

Page 351: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Copy references from CRANK_SKEL.PRT to the CRANK.PRT.

1. Click Open . Select CRANK.PRT and click Open.

2. Click Copy Geometry from the Get Data group.

3. In the dashboard, de-select Published Geometry Only and thenclick Open .

4. Select CRANK_SKEL.PRT and click Open.5. In the Placement dialog box, click Coord Sys and select

PRT_CSYS_DEF from the model tree of each model.

6. Click OK to close the dialog box.7. In the dashboard, select the

References tab and activate theSurface Sets field.

8. Query-select the entire surfacequilt of CRANK_SKEL.PRT.

9. Activate the Chain field andselect the outer curve featureshown in the figure.

10. Activate the References field.Press CTRL and select axesCRANK and PIN_1 from theModel Tree(2).

11. Click Complete Feature .

12. Click Close from the QuickAccess toolbar.

Geometry copied from a skeleton into the design model isassociative. If the skeleton changes, the referencing design modelupdates accordingly, as well as all geometry referencing the copiedgeometry.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 25

Page 352: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating and Placing Models using SkeletonReferencesYou can create solid models and place components byreferencing a skeleton.

Create Solid Geometry

• Utilize Copy Geometry• Surfaces/Planes/AxesRedefine Unplaced Components

• New Solid Geometry• Copy GeometryChanges Propagate Figure 1 – Skeleton

Figure 2 – Complete Assembly Figure 3 – Referencing Model

Creating and Placing Models using Skeleton ReferencesOnce you have used a Copy Geometry feature to share references, you canbegin to create solid geometry utilizing the copied references. You can eitheropen the component in its own window or activate the component and modelin the context of the assembly. You can use the copied surfaces, planes,axes, and so on by referencing them when creating sketches, solid features,and other datum features in the model.

Once enough references exist, you can redefine unplaced components.You can select either the new solid geometry or copied geometry to defineplacement using constraints or connections.

Once you have referenced the copied geometry in the creation of modelfeatures, edits to the skeleton propagate to the model.

In the figure shown, the space claim surfaces from the skeleton arebeing used to create solid tube shapes for the beginning of theengine block model. Holes are also created using the copied axes.Finally, the unplaced bolts from the original assembly structure arenow placed, referencing both solid geometry and the copied axes.

Module 11 | Page 26 © 2012 PTC

Page 353: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating and Placing Models UsingSkeleton ReferencesClose Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Skeletons_Placing-ModelsNONE

Task 1: Reference copied features to create features in the block part.

1. Click File > Options. The Creo Parametric Options window appears.2. Select Configuration Editor from the menu on the left.3. Click Add.... In the Option name field of the Options window, type

multiple_skeletons_allowed. Edit the Option value drop-downmenu to Yes, and click OK.

The multiple_skeletons_allowed configuration file optiondetermines whether multiple skeletons can be created.

4. Click OK and click No to confirm that the configuration edits made areapplied to the current session only.

If the Yes option is selected, the settings are saved to aconfiguration file and loaded during the next session.

5. Click Open and double-click AC40.ASM.

6. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .7. In the model tree, expand ENGINE.ASM. Right-click BLOCK.PRT

and select Open.8. In the ribbon, select the View tab. Click the Appearance Gallery

drop-down menu. Select the Clear Appearance drop-down listand select Clear All Appearances.

9. Click Yes in the Confirm dialog box.

10. Select the Model tab. Select theExtern Copy Geom feature inthe model tree.

11. Click Thicken from theEditing group. Edit the thicknessto 2 and press ENTER.

12. Click Complete Feature .

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 27

Page 354: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

13. Select datum plane TOP and click Extrude from the Shapesgroup.

14. From the Sketching group, click Project . Click Loop in the Typedialog box.

15. Select the datum curve at theright side of the model.

16. Click OK .17. Edit the depth to 4 and press

ENTER.18. Click Complete Feature .

19. Click Plane Display todisable their display.

20. Click Hole from theEngineering group and selectaxis HOLE1.

21. Press CTRL and select the hole'splacement surface, as shown inthe figure.

22. Edit the diameter to 3 and selectThrough All to edit thedepth.

23. Click Complete Feature .

Module 11 | Page 28 © 2012 PTC

Page 355: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

24. With the hole still selected, pressCTRL+C and then CTRL+V.

25. Select axis HOLE2. Press CTRLand select the hole's placementsurface, as shown in the figure.

26. Click Complete Feature .27. In the model tree, right-click the

Extern Copy Geom feature andselect Hide.

28. Click Close from the QuickAccess toolbar.

Task 2: Reference copied geometry to create features in the crank part.

1. Right-click CRANK.PRT and select Open.2. In the ribbon, select the View tab. Click the Appearance Gallery

drop-down menu. Select the Clear Appearance drop-down listand select Clear All Appearances.

3. Click Yes in the Confirm dialog box.4. Select the Model tab.5. Select the Extern Copy Geom feature in the model tree, then click

Solidify from the Editing group.6. Click Complete Feature .

7. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.8. Select the far end of the cylinder.9. From the Sketching group, click Project . Click Loop in the Type

dialog box.

10. Select the datum curve and clickOK .

11. Flip the feature direction towardsyou and drag the depth to 6.

12. Click Complete Feature .

The direction arrow should be pointed towards you.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 29

Page 356: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

13. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.14. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.15. Click Use Previous.

16. Click References from the Setup group. Select axis PIN_1 as areference and click Close.

17. Sketch a circle with a diameter of 5 centered on PIN_1. Click OK .

18. Edit the depth to 6 and pressENTER.

19. Click Complete Feature .20. In the model tree, right-click the

Extern Copy Geom feature andselect Hide.

21. Click Close from the QuickAccess toolbar.

22. Right-click CRANK.PRT in the model tree and select Edit Definitionto display it in the graphics window.

23. Click Complete Component .

Task 3: Clean up the display and assemble bolts.

1. Press CTRL and select MAIN_SKEL.PRT and CRANK_SKEL.PRT inthe model tree. Right-click and select Hide.

2. Select BLOCK.PRT.3. From the Model Display drop-down list, click Component Display

Style > Transparent.

4. In the model tree, right-clickBOLT_8.PRT and select EditDefinition.

5. Click Show In AssemblyWindow from the dashboard.

6. Constrain the bolt as shownin the figure and then clickComplete Component .

Module 11 | Page 30 © 2012 PTC

Page 357: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

7. Click Axis Display to disabletheir display.

8. Select BOLT_8.PRT and pressCTRL+C and CTRL+V.

9. Constrain the bolt into thelast hole as shown in thefigure and then click CompleteComponent .

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 31

Page 358: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating a Motion SkeletonYou can use a motion skeleton to create a mechanism frameworkof your design.

Figure 1 – Skeleton Body

Define Mechanisms Quickly:

• Motion/Body SkeletonsSteps:

• Motion Skeleton (.ASM)• Sketch• Body Skeletons (.PRT)• Body Connections• Solid Models• Solid Geometry

Figure 2 – ComponentReferencing Body

Creating a Motion SkeletonA motion skeleton is a completely different skeleton type that enables youto define mechanisms quickly. A motion skeleton consists of the followingskeleton types:• Motion Skeleton – A special assembly skeleton type in which bodyskeletons are created.

• Body Skeleton – A special part skeleton type. Multiple body skeletons arecreated within a motion skeleton. One body skeleton is created for eachmechanism body, including the ground body.

Once created, the motion skeleton is actually an assembly of body skeletons.Each body skeleton is automatically assembled with mechanism connections.You can use the motion skeleton to control multiple components by sharinggeometry, similar to the way in which you use a standard skeleton. However,in the case of the motion skeleton, the geometry is automatically shared withthe end components.The following are the overall steps used to create a motion skeleton:• Create the motion skeleton (assembly skeleton).• Create a sketch to represent the mechanism movement and bodies.• Create the body skeleton (part skeleton).• Define the body to body connections for each body skeleton.

Module 11 | Page 32 © 2012 PTC

Page 359: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

• Create the solid models, attaching them to a respective body skeleton.• Create the solid geometry in the solid models.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 33

Page 360: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Sketching a Motion SkeletonYou can create a sketch to define the motion of your skeleton.

Created in Motion Skeleton

Sketch to Represent:

• Ground Body• Mechanism Bodies• Joint ConnectionsSketching Techniques:

• All-In-One Sketch• Overlapping Entities

Figure 1 – Motion Skeleton Sketch

Sketching a Motion SkeletonAfter creating the motion skeleton assembly, you create a sketch. The sketchmust represent the following:• The Ground Body – This is a non-moving component.• Any Mechanism Bodies – Any moving part in the mechanism.• Joint Connections, which are as follows:– Pin joints can be defined at entity intersections or at circle centers.– Slider joints can be defined from overlapping lines.– Bearing joints can be defined where a line meets a non-endpoint location

of another line.– A Slot connection can be defined where a line endpoint lies on an arc

or circle.– Ball and Cylinder joints can be selected at locations where a Pin joint

is found.When you sketch a motion skeleton, you use different techniques than atypical feature sketch. Sketching a motion skeleton is similar to sketching aseries of curves for a typical skeleton. For example, for a motion skeleton, youcan define the mechanism in a single sketch. The sketch itself does not haveto move like the mechanism would if you were to drag the sketched entities.The motion is computed after the selection of bodies and connections. Also,in a sketch for a motion skeleton, it is typical to overlap entities or createduplicate coincident entities for use in multiple bodies.

In Figure 1, a sketch is defined to represent a simple motor:a ground, a crankshaft, a connecting rod, and a piston are allrepresented.

Module 11 | Page 34 © 2012 PTC

Page 361: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Sketching a Motion Skeleton

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Skeleton-Motion_Sketch MOTOR.ASM

Task 1: Create the motion skeleton.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Click Create .3. Select Skeleton Model as the type and Motion as the subtype.4. Edit the Name to motion_skel and click OK.5. Click Browse.6. Select MM_KG_SEC_ASSY.ASM and click Open.7. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.

The motion skeleton is an assembly.

Task 2: Sketch the line representing the ground of the motion skeleton.

1. In the model tree, right-clickMOTION_SKEL.ASM and selectActivate.

2. In the graphics window, selectthe ASM_FRONT datum plane.

3. In the Datum group, click Sketch.

4. Click Plane Display todisable the display.

5. Click Sketch View fromthe In Graphics toolbar. Sketcha vertical line, as shown in thefigure. Edit its length to 100.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 35

Page 362: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

6. Sketch the following additionalentities to represent the crank:• A circle. Edit its diameter to30.

• A line at a 45° angle.Dimension it as shown inthe figure.

• A circle. Edit its diameter to 5.

7. Sketch the following additional entities to represent the piston:• A circle approximately midway along the vertical line representingthe ground. Make the diameter equal to the smaller, previouslysketched circle.

Do not snap the circle to the midpoint of the vertical line.

• A short vertical line with a midpoint at the center of the previouslysketched circle.

• A rectangle that is centered on the vertical ground line. Locate thetop and bottom edges of the rectangle on the previously sketchedshort vertical line.

• Edit the dimensions to 35 and 20, as shown in the figure.

Module 11 | Page 36 © 2012 PTC

Page 363: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

8. Sketch the following additionalentities to represent the rod:• A line between the circle at thecenter of the piston and theend of the crank.

• Dimension the length of theline and edit its length to 50,as shown in the figure.

• Sketch one additional circle ateach end of the line. Both newcircles should be on top of thecircles already placed at thoselocations and they should havethe same diameter.

9. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 37

Page 364: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Bodies for a Motion SkeletonYou can create body skeletons from the motion skeleton sketch.

Create Body Skeletons:

• Select Curve Chains• System Creates Bodies

Figure 1 – Motion Skeleton

Figure 2 – Body Definition Figure 3 – Selecting Body Curves

Creating Bodies for a Motion Skeleton

Once the sketch for the motion skeleton is defined, you can create the bodyskeletons. A body skeleton is a special type of part skeleton, which thesystem creates after you select references from the motion skeleton sketch.The system also automatically copies any selected chains from the sketchinto the body skeleton.

In Figure 1, the model tree shows the motion skeleton assemblycontaining four body skeleton part models. The selections used tocreate the ROD_SKEL.PRT are also shown in the figure.

Module 11 | Page 38 © 2012 PTC

Page 365: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Bodies for a Motion Skeleton

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Skeleton-Motion_Bodies MOTOR.ASM

Task 1: Create the ground body skeleton.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.2. In the model tree, right-click MOTION_SKEL.ASM and select

Activate.

3. Click Create from theComponent group.

4. Select Body as the subtype.5. Edit the Name to ground_skel

and click OK.6. Select Empty and click OK in

the Creation Options dialog box.7. Query-select the single green

line shown in the figure.8. Click Accept in the BODY

DEFINITION dialog box.

9. In the model tree, expand MOTION_SKEL.ASM. NoticeGROUND_SKEL.PRT is created.

Task 2: Create the crank body skeleton.

1. Click Create from theComponent group.

2. Select Body as the subtype.3. Edit the Name to crank_skel

and click OK.4. Click OK in the Creation Options

dialog box.5. Select the large circle shown.6. Press CTRL and query-select

both the small green circle andangled line, as shown in thefigure.

7. Click Accept .

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 39

Page 366: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 3: Create the rod body skeleton.

1. Click Create from theComponent group.

2. Select Body as the subtype.3. Edit the Name to rod_skel and

click OK.4. Click OK in the Creation Options

dialog box.5. Query-select the angled green

line shown.6. Press CTRL and select the small

green circles at the ends of theselected line.

7. Click Accept .

Task 4: Create the piston body skeleton.

1. Click Create from theComponent group.

2. Select Body as the subtype.3. Edit the Name to piston_skel

and click OK.4. Click OK in the Creation Options

dialog box.5. Query-select the green

rectangular section, as shown.6. Press CTRL and query-select

both the small green circle andgreen vertical line at the centerof the selected rectangle.

7. Click Accept .

When you select curves from the sketch (those added to the Chainsfield of the BODY_DEFINITION dialog box), you are selectingcurves to be copied into the individual body skeleton that you arecreating.

This completes the procedure.

Module 11 | Page 40 © 2012 PTC

Page 367: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Assigning Connections for a Motion SkeletonYou can assign mechanism connections to each body skeleton.

Update Connection List:

• Remove Unwanted• Select TypeCopy Geometry Created:

• Selected Curves• Axes/PointsDrag Mechanism Assy

Figure 1 – Skeleton

Assigning Connections for a Motion SkeletonOnce the body skeletons are created, you can assign the connections foreach body skeleton. You can update the connection list within the dialogbox used to create each body skeleton. You can remove the unwantedconnections after highlighting each on the model. For some connectiontypes, a drop-down list is available to select the desired connection type.For example, you can enable a 2-D sketch to have 3-D motion by changingall the pin connections to ball joints.

Copy Geometry CreationOnce the body definition is completed with a defined connections list, thesystem creates a Copy Geometry feature to support the connection typesin the body skeleton part containing the selected curve chains and theautomatically created datum features.

Datum features are automatically created in a group following the motionskeleton sketch. The type of datum feature created depends on the type ofconnection. For example, pin joints require axes while ball joints requirepoints. The system includes these datum features in the Copy Geometryfeature along with the curve chains.

Component Placement Dialog BoxYou can also use the Invoke Component Placement Dialog option to accessthe dashboard for each body skeleton definition. This enables you tomanually control the types of connections being created.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 41

Page 368: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

The MotionAfter all the body skeletons have been defined, you can drag the mechanismor start Mechanism mode to assign motors and perform mechanism analyses.

In the figure shown, the dialog box shows a body definition with theselected chains and the initial list of possible connections.

Module 11 | Page 42 © 2012 PTC

Page 369: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Assigning Connections for a MotionSkeleton

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Skeleton-Motion_Connections MOTOR.ASM

Task 1: Assign connections for the crank skeleton.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters....3. Under Display, select the Features check box.

• Click OK.

4. Select FRONT from the Named Views from the In Graphicstoolbar.

5. In the model tree, expand MOTION_SKEL.ASM.

GROUND_SKEL.PRT is not identified in the model tree with apackaged symbol next to it. This means it is fully constrained anddoes not need to have connections assigned to it.

6. Right-click CRANK_SKEL.PRTand select Edit Definition.

7. In the BODY DEFINITION dialogbox, select Update to view alist of the possible connectionsavailable for the body.

8. Right-click the Pin connectionthat references F5(SKETCH_1)and select Remove.

9. Keep the remaining Pinconnection that referencesEnd:Curve:F5.

10. Click Accept in the BODYDEFINITION dialog box.

Task 2: Assign connections for the rod skeleton.

1. In the model tree, expand MOTION_SKEL.ASM.2. Right-click ROD_SKEL.PRT and select Edit Definition.3. In the BODY DEFINITION dialog box, select Update to view a list of

the possible connections available for the body.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 43

Page 370: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

4. Press CTRL and select theSlot and Bearing connections.Right-click and select Remove.

5. Remove all of the remainingconnections except the Pinconnection at the center of thecircle and at the end of theangled line. This connectionreferences F5(SKETCH_1).

6. Click Accept .

Task 3: Assign connections for the piston skeleton.

1. In the model tree, right-clickPISTON_SKEL.PRT and selectEdit Definition.

2. In the BODY DEFINITION dialogbox, select Update.

3. Ensure the slider connectionis maintained, shown by a linethrough the piston body.

4. Keep the Pin connection that isat the center of the circle (shownin the model as a highlight at thecenter of the circle, and at theend of the connecting line).

5. Remove all remainingconnections (except the twoyou have been instructed tokeep).

6. Select Cylinder from the Connections drop-down list.7. Click Accept .

8. Click Axis Display to enable their display.9. Examine the model tree and expand the group MOTION_AXES.

An axis was created at every assigned connection.

Task 4: Edit the motion skeleton.

1. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit.

2. Edit the 45° angle to 90 and click Regenerate Model in theOperations group.

Module 11 | Page 44 © 2012 PTC

Page 371: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

3. Click Drag Componentsfrom the Component group.

4. In the Drag dialog box, select theSnapshots tab and click Take

Snapshot .5. Select and drag the skeleton

by selecting the small circle, asshown in the figure.

6. Double-click Snapshot1 in theSnapshots list and then clickClose.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 45

Page 372: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Creating Solid Models from a Motion SkeletonYou can create solid models, referencing bodies of the motionskeleton.

Create Component:

• Attach to Body Option• Merge Feature CreatedOpen Component:

• Create Features• Utilize ReferencesView/Drag in Assy Figure 1 – Merged Feature

Figure 2 – Solid Model in Assembly Figure 3 – Solid Model

Creating Solid Models from a Motion SkeletonOnce all the body skeletons have been created and the mechanism motiontested, you can create solid part models from the motion skeleton assembly.

First, you create a standard solid part in the context of the assembly.However, you do not place the component manually. Instead, you selectthe Attach to Body option and select a particular body skeleton. This actiondoes two things; it assembles the component to the body skeleton part andsimultaneously copies all of the references from the skeleton part to thecomponent using a merge feature.

You can then activate or open the component and begin to create solidgeometry with the copied references. You can utilize the copied surfaces,planes, axes, and so on by referencing them when creating sketches, solidfeatures, and other datum features in the model. Once you have referencedthe copied geometry in the creation of model features, edits to the motionskeleton sketch can propagate through to the model.

As shown in the figures, the copied curves from the motion skeletonsketch, as well as the copied axes from the connections, are beingused to create a solid model for the connecting rod of the motor.Holes are also created using the copied axes. Now that solidfeatures are created, you can return to the assembly and drag themechanism with the solid models attached.

Module 11 | Page 46 © 2012 PTC

Page 373: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

PROCEDURE - Creating Solid Models from a MotionSkeleton

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Advanced_Assembly\Skeleton-Motion_Solid-Models MOTOR.ASM

Task 1: Create a component by referencing the motion skeleton.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Click Create .3. Select Part as the type and Solid as the subtype.4. Edit the Name to rod and click OK.5. Click Browse.... Select MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT and click Open.6. Select the Attach Component to Body check box.7. In the model tree, expand MOTION_SKEL.ASM and select

ROD_SKEL.PRT.8. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.

9. In the model tree, right-clickROD.PRT and select Open.

The External Merge featurein the model tree copiesreference geometry fromthe motion skeleton into thispart.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 47

Page 374: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

10. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.11. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.12. Select FRONT from the model tree to define the Sketch Plane. Select

Top from the Orientation drop-down list and click Sketch in theSketch dialog box.

13. Click Sketch View from the Setup group.

14. In the Setup group, click References . Select both axes and thesmall circular curves and click Close.

15. Using the referenced axes, create a slot-shaped sketch, as shown inthe figure.

The sketch image shown in the figure contains two arcs, twohorizontal lines, and two circles at the center of each arc.

16. Click OK .17. Press CTRL+D.18. Edit the depth direction to Both

Sides .19. Edit the depth to 8 and press

ENTER.20. Click Complete Feature .

Module 11 | Page 48 © 2012 PTC

Page 375: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Task 2: Drag the solid model using the motion skeleton.

1. Click Close from the QuickAccess toolbar.

2. Select Default Orientationfrom the Named Viewsdrop-down list from the InGraphics toolbar.

3. Click Axis Display to disabletheir display.

4. Click Drag Componentsfrom the Component group.

5. Select ROD.PRT and drag themodel using the motion skeleton.

This completes the procedure.

© 2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 49

Page 376: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module 11 | Page 50 © 2012 PTC

Page 377: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Module12Project

Module OverviewUsing Creo Parametric and the skills learned in this course, complete thefollowing project design tasks.

ObjectivesAfter completing this module, you will be able to:• Complete DRIVETRAIN_SKEL.PRT.• Create the AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT.• Assemble the AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT.• Assemble the LINK_SKEL.PRT.• Create the AUX_ARM.PRT.• Create the AUX_SHAFT.PRT.• Share geometry from a skeleton.• Edit a skeleton controlled design.• Create simplified reps.• Create display styles.• Assemble using mechanism constraints.• Add flexibility to STUD.PRT.

© 2012 PTC Module 12 | Page 1

Page 378: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

The Table FanIn this project, you will complete the design of a table fan.

Figure 1 – Completed Table Fan

Project ScenarioProduct Design Consulting, Inc. (PDC) is in charge of designing a table fanfor one of their customers. Upon returning from Creo Parametric AdvancedAssembly Design training, you are assigned to complete the table fanbecause the engineer originally responsible for the design is on vacation.

You will use the skills learned in previous topics of this course to create thefinal assembly and components of the air circulator.

Minimal InstructionsBecause all tasks in this project are based on topics that you have learned upto this point in the course, instructions for each project step will be minimal.There will be no step-by-step picks and clicks given. This provides you witha chance to test your knowledge of the materials as you proceed thoughthe project.

Completed Models for ReferenceBe sure to save all project models within the working subfolder of the projectclassroom folder structure. The project folder also contains a sub-foldernamed completed. Here you will find a completed version of each model inthe project. These completed models can be used as reference if required.

Module 12 | Page 2 © 2012 PTC

Page 379: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Skeleton ModelsThis slide illustrates the skeleton models used in the design.

Figure 1 – BASE_SKEL Figure 2 – DRIVETRAIN_SKEL

Figure 3 – LINK_SKEL Figure 4 – AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL

The Base, Drivetrain, and Link SkeletonsThe base, drivetrain, and link skeletons have already been created. You usethem to share geometry to related components and as a placement referencewhen positioning components.

The AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT ModelYou will create the AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT. You will use it to sharegeometry to other models and as an assembly reference when positioningcomponents.

© 2012 PTC Module 12 | Page 3

Page 380: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

The Shaft and Arm PartsThis slide illustrates the shaft and arm parts that you will createin this project.

Figure 1 – AUX_ARM Figure 2 – AUX_SHAFT

The Shaft and Arm PartsThe arm and shaft models are created by referencing geometry that iscopied into them from the skeleton model. This ensures that the two modelsfit together perfectly.

Module 12 | Page 4 © 2012 PTC

Page 381: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Components to AssembliesThis slide illustrates a few of the components you will assemblein the design.

Figure 1 – AUX_ARM andAUX_SHAFT Figure 2 – HUB

Figure 3 – BLADE Figure 4 – BOLT_4–08

Components to AssembliesThroughout this design, you will use various techniques such as simplifiedreps, display styles, substitution, replace, flexibility, and component interfacesto make the assembly process easier and more efficient.

© 2012 PTC Module 12 | Page 5

Page 382: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Editing the DesignThis slide illustrates edits that will be made to the design.

Figure 1 – Initial Design Figure 2 – After Edits to the Skeleton

Figure 3 – Initial Position Figure 4 – Dragged Position

Editing the DesignEdits made to the skeleton model will propagate changes throughout thedesign.

You can drag components that are positioned using mechanism constraintsthrough their motion.

Module 12 | Page 6 © 2012 PTC

Page 383: T3904-390-02_SG-Ins_Lec_EN

Copyright

Advanced Assembly Design using Creo Parametric2.0Copyright © 2012 Parametric Technology Corporation and/or Its Subsidiary Companies.All Rights Reserved.User and training guides and related documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation and its subsidiary companies (collectively"PTC") are subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and are provided under a license agreement that restrictscopying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed formof this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement underwhich the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided byPTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred,modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior writtenconsent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as awarranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietaryinformation, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any formor medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written priorapproval from PTC.UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.PTC regards software piracy as the crime it is, and we view offenders accordingly. We do not tolerate the piracy of PTC software products,and we pursue (both civilly and criminally) those who do so using all legal means available, including public and private surveillance resources.As part of these efforts, PTC uses data monitoring and scouring technologies to obtain and transmit data on users of illegal copies of oursoftware. This data collection is not performed on users of legally licensed software from PTC and its authorized distributors. If you are usingan illegal copy of our software and do not consent to the collection and transmission of such data (including to the United States), ceaseusing the illegal version, and contact PTC to obtain a legally licensed copy.Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information: See the About Box, or copyright notice, of your PTC software.UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGENDThis document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b)(OCT’95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (JUN’95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial licenseonly. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forthin subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT’88) or CommercialComputer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN’87), as applicable. 01012012Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA

PRINTING HISTORYDocument No. Date DescriptionT3904-390-02 05/04/2012 Initial Printing of:

Advanced Assembly Design using CreoParametric 2.0Order Number DT-T3904-390-02

Printed in the U.S.A